Instructor utilities guide

Y Science Virtual Laboratories v3.0

Instructor Utilities

Brigham Young University

i

Table of Contents


Overview .............................................................................................................1

Introduction....................................................................................................1 Software Configurations ..................................................................................1 Electronic Assignments and the Web Connectivity Option ..................................2

Quick Start ..........................................................................................................4 Database.............................................................................................................5 Class Management ...............................................................................................6

Class Roll........................................................................................................7 Inorganic Assignments ..................................................................................11 Quantum Assignments ..................................................................................16

Gases Assignments .......................................................................................20 Titration Assignments....................................................................................24

Calorimetry Assignments ...............................................................................32 Mechanics, Circuits, and Optics Assignments...................................................38 Density Assignments .....................................................................................43

Organic Assignments.....................................................................................48 Scores..........................................................................................................54 Grading .............................................................................................................55

Utilities..............................................................................................................58 Overview ......................................................................................................58 Backup .........................................................................................................58

Restore ........................................................................................................59 Reset ...........................................................................................................59 Messages .....................................................................................................59

Web Tools ....................................................................................................61 Database......................................................................................................63

Y Science Server Administration Introduction.......................................................................................................64

Requirements ...............................................................................................64 Access and Initial Configuration .....................................................................65 Administrative Pages ..........................................................................................65

General Settings ...........................................................................................65 Server Diagnostic ..........................................................................................66 Users ...........................................................................................................66

Logs.............................................................................................................66 Database Settings .........................................................................................66 Change Password..........................................................................................67

ii

Appendices

INI Variables and Management Issues ............................................................A-1

ChemLab INI File ..............................................................................................A-1

Database Issues ...............................................................................................A-1 Lab Book Issues................................................................................................A-2 Servlet Engine URL ......................................................................................A-2

Automatic Web Updates ...............................................................................A-3 Window Behavior .........................................................................................A-3 Inorganic INI Files ............................................................................................A-3

Quantum INI Files.............................................................................................A-3 Lab.ini .........................................................................................................A-4 Video.ini ......................................................................................................A-6

Spectro.ini ...................................................................................................A-7 Phosphor.ini ................................................................................................A-7 KE.ini ..........................................................................................................A-8

Diode.ini......................................................................................................A-9 Preset Experiments ......................................................................................A-9 Gases INI Files................................................................................................A-12

Gases.ini ...................................................................................................A-12 Units.ini.....................................................................................................A-17

Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-20 Titration INI Files ............................................................................................A-22 Lab Variables.ini.........................................................................................A-22

Acids.ini or Bases.ini...................................................................................A-25 Oxidants.ini ...............................................................................................A-27 Reductants.ini............................................................................................A-29

Salts.ini .....................................................................................................A-32 Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-33 Calorimetry INI Files .......................................................................................A-36

Lab Variables.ini.........................................................................................A-37 Metals.ini...................................................................................................A-40 Organicn.ini...............................................................................................A-41

Reactionn.ini .............................................................................................A-41 Saltn.ini.....................................................................................................A-45 Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-46

Mechanics INI Files .........................................................................................A-50 Mechanics.ini .............................................................................................A-50 Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-69

iii

Density INI Files .............................................................................................A-74 Density.ini .................................................................................................A-74

Solids.ini....................................................................................................A-75 Colors.ini ...................................................................................................A-80 Fluids.ini....................................................................................................A-83

Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-89 Circuits INI Files..............................................................................................A-92 Circuits.ini .................................................................................................A-92

Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-93 Optics INI Files ...............................................................................................A-94

Optics.ini ...................................................................................................A-94 Preset Experiments ....................................................................................A-96

List of Organic Synthesis Assignments.............................................................B-1 List of Organic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns................................................C-1

Quantum Equations .......................................................................................... D-1

Answers to Preset Unknowns............................................................................E-1 Inorganic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns ............................................................E-1 Organic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns...............................................................E-2

Titration Unknowns ...........................................................................................E-5

1


Overview

Introduction Welcome to Y Science Laboratories, a set of realistic and sophisticated simulations covering

general chemistry, organic chemistry, and physics laboratories. In these laboratories, students are

put into a virtual environment where they are free to make the choices and decisions that they

would confront in an actual laboratory setting and, in turn, experience the resulting

consequences. These laboratories include simulations of inorganic qualitative analysis,

fundamental experiments in quantum chemistry, gas properties, titration experiments,

calorimetry, mechanics, planetary motion, density, electric circuits, optics, organic synthesis, and

organic qualitative analysis. These simulations are packaged in various combinations to produce

Virtual ChemLab: General Chemistry Laboratories, Virtual ChemLab: Organic Synthesis and

Organic Qualitative Analysis, Virtual Physical Science, Virtual Physics, and Virtual Earth

Science. Y Science Laboratories is the umbrella product that covers all of the simulations, and

Instructor Utilities is the administrative tool used to create classes and assignments and retrieve

the student’s work for grading for any of these products. For the remainder of this users guide,

the term Y Science refers to the particular simulation package that you have purchased.

Each of the simulation packages sold under the Y Science umbrella can be purchased as a site

license version or as a student or single user version. The site license version is intended for

institutions (high schools, colleges, universities, etc.) and the student version is intended for

individual student use, although the two will often be combined together. The site license

version, in addition to allowing multiple installations of the software at an institution, is the only

version that includes the administrative stockroom Instructor Utilities. This Users guide

describes how to manage classes and assignments in Y Science using Instructor Utilities, but

keep in mind that your product may not have all of the simulations described here.

Software Configurations Although the Y Science simulations can be used as an exploratory activity or tool for students,

the true power of the simulations is realized when students enter the virtual laboratory and

perform assignments or experiments given to them by the instructor just as they would do in an

actual laboratory setting. Because these laboratories are virtual, a wide variety of experiences can

be provided ranging from very basic and guided to very complex and open-ended. It is up to the

instructor to decide the best use of the laboratories whether it be as a pre-lab, a lab replacement, a

homework or quiz assignment, a lab supplement, or a lecture discussion activity. Because each

instructor will have a different comfort level using software in the classroom or laboratory and

will have different levels of technical support available, several different methods of

implementing the simulations at an institution have been provided. Brief descriptions of these are

listed below. Details on actually installing the software are given in the installation instructions.

Workbook Version. In this configuration, an electronic workbook is provided at the beginning of

the simulation that allows students to select experiments that correspond to laboratory

assignments in an accompanying “real” workbook. Students can also enter the laboratory,

bypassing the electronic workbook, to explore in the laboratory on their own or to perform

2

custom experiments written by the instructor. This version of the software has the full

functionality of the various simulations and can also receive electronic assignments through the

Web Connectivity Option. (See the Electronic Assignments and Web Connectivity Option

section below.) The workbook configuration is the most simple to install and use and requires

almost no oversight by the instructor. The single user version of Y Science installs the software in

the workbook configuration, and the site license version can also be used to install the software

in this configuration on as many institutional computers as necessary.

Direct Access Computer Lab (A Network Version). In this implementation, a centralized database

is installed on a network drive accessible to all client computers in the local area network, and

the Y Science software is installed on any client computers needing access to the simulations.

This installation is called a direct access installation since the client software accesses the

database containing the class lists, assignments, lab books, and scores directly using a mapped or

named network drive. This version allows instructors to give assignments and receive results

electronically. This is a simple installation for computer labs and allows multiple instructors to

use the software, but there are some network security issues associated with this type of

installation. The electronic workbook is available in this installation, but the focus is for students

to receive their assignments and unknowns electronically.

Web Access Computer Lab (A Network Version). This implementation is very similar to the

direct access installation described above except in this instance, the assignment and lab book

data is passed indirectly to the database using a servlet engine running on a TomCat web server.

This installation does not require a local area network but, instead, only requires a simple

connection to the internet. This installation also corrects several security issues associated with a

direct access connection. Details on setting up and using the web connectivity feature is given in

the Instructor Utilities user guide from the management perspective and in the various

simulation user guides from the student perspective. It is strongly suggested the user guides be

reviewed before trying to implement this version. Most questions and problems can be avoided if

the user guides are studied carefully. The electronic workbook is available in this installation, but

the focus is for students to receive their assignments and unknowns electronically.

Electronic Assignments and the Web Connectivity Option As was described previously, one of the key features of the Y Science simulations is the ability to

give assignments to students using either worksheets out of an accompanying workbook or

electronically. Although worksheets are a convenient method to give assignments to students,

electronic assignments offer the largest variety of activities and the most control over them. The

purpose of the Instructor Utilities component of Y Science is to allow instructors to create

electronic assignments, submit them to students, retrieve the student lab books, and assign

scores. The ability to give assignments and retrieve results is only available when students

running the software have access to the Y Science database (see the Database section below).

Installing a direct access version in a local area network is one way of doing this; however, this

generally limits students to working in a computer lab.

A more flexible approach has been developed where the necessary information for assignments

from the instructor and the results from students can be passed indirectly through a servlet engine

running on a TomCat server. (Details on installing and setting up the servlet engine can be found

3

in the Installation and Overview guide.) This method of passing data is called the Web

Connectivity Option or Web Database Access. The advantages of this method include (a) it

allows an institution to still setup the software in a computer lab without requiring read/write

privileges on a network drive (a moderate security hole) and (b) students can install their own

copies of the software and still have access to electronic assignments wherever they are as long

as they have access to the internet. The general principles upon which the Web Connectivity

Option is based are described next.

1. The database containing the class lists, assignments, lab books, and scores must still be

maintained but it can now be stored on a local computer if only one instructor will be using it

or it can be stored on a network drive if multiple instructors will be using the same servlet

engine to pass data to and from the students. See the Database section below for more

details.

2. The Web Connectivity Option works by using the servlet engine as a vehicle to receive data

from both the instructor and students and save it temporarily on the server. The instructor

will send (update) data for each class (from the main database), which the student can, in

turn, retrieve and download to their own computer. In a like manner, a student submits

(updates) their results for an assignment to the server and the instructor, in turn, will retrieve

those results and incorporate them into the main database. This synchronization of the

instructor and student databases is the responsibility of the individual users. If regular

synchronization is not performed by both the students and instructor, then unpredictable

results can occur. On the student side, this synchronization occurs automatically as long as

there is an internet connection.

3. For Instructor Utilities, the Update and Retrieve functions can be performed at two locations.

First, the Class Roll folder for each class has an Update Web button and Retrieve Web button.

Clicking these buttons performs the indicated action for the selected class. Secondly, the

Utilities drawer contains a Web Tools folder where multiple classes can be selected and the

Update and Retrieve functions performed for the selected classes.

4. The information a student must have to use the Web Connectivity Option is their username,

password, and the URL address for the servlet engine. The username and password are

assigned when a student is added to a class. Details on using the student side of the Web

Connectivity Option is given in the individual laboratory user guides. Details on setting up

classes and assignments are given in the Instructor Utilities user guide.

5. Before the Web Connectivity Option can be used, the Web Connectivity Option must be

enabled and the URL address for the servlet engine specified in the Web Tools folder. Details

on configuring the Web Connectivity Option and other important web functions are found in

the Web Tools section.

4

Quick Start

Getting into the Stockroom The stockroom (shown in Figure 1), as entered via the stockroom door in the hallway, is the

laboratory management side of Y Science and is used by instructors to establish classes, make

assignments, and view the results, grades, and lab books of the students. Access to this part of

the stockroom (or Instructor Utilities) is allowed only to those individuals with administrative

rights by typing in an administrative username and password at the stockroom card reader. The

stockroom is divided into three main areas or functions:

(1) Class Management

(2) Grading

(3) Utilities

Figure 1. The stockroom main screen. The upper two drawers of the filing cabinet access

class management functions, the bottom drawer accesses database backup and

restore functions as well as other utilities, and the stack of lab books accesses

grading functions. Click the bell for help.

5

Brief descriptions of these areas are given next.

Class Management Class Management functions are accessed by clicking one of the top two drawers of the filing

cabinet. Some of the functions available in these drawers include creating classes, managing

access privileges, defining assignments for the different labs, and viewing scores and lab books.

Grading The grading of a specific assignment for an entire class is accessed by clicking the stack of lab

books on the desk. Depending on the type of assignment being graded, various options are

available to make the assignment of scores as painless as possible.

Utilities Since the class lists, assignments, scores, and lab books are stored in a centralized database, basic

backup and restore functions are available to protect against accidental or intentional corruption

of the database. These functions are accessed by clicking the bottom drawer of the filing cabinet.

Other functions include broadcasting messages to a class or set of classes, handling web

connectivity for multiple classes, and changing the database location.

Database

The database that contains the classes, students, assignments, scores, and lab books is kept in the

Data folder, which is either installed with the software or in another common access location.

The database is stored as encrypted text files and cannot be accessed or modified without the

encryption key. All login information is stored in a separate file, and student lists, assignments,

and scores are stored in files for each individual class. A separate subdirectory is created for each

student inside the Data directory and contains the data for each student’s lab book. Because the

database is centralized and contains important grading information, simple backup and restore

functionality has been added to protect against accidental or intentional corruption of the

database. The backup and restore functions are not intended to protect against hardware failures.

Multiple databases can be managed using the same Instructor Utilities by changing the database

path in the Database folder in the Utilities drawer of the filing cabinet.

In a direct access client/server installation, the database (and other common files and directories)

must be kept on a mapped (PC) or named (Mac) network drive that all Y Science client

computers can access with read/write/erase privileges. In a web access client/server installation,

the database can be stored on a network drive if several instructors will need access to the

database or it can be kept on a local drive, even on a portable computer, as long as there is an

internet connection to allow for the update and retrieval of the web data. Details on using the

web connectivity functionality can be found in the Web Connectivity Option section.

Note: Multiple instances of the Instructor Utilities that are using the same database can be open

at any given time. However, during grading, adding classes and students, and making

assignments it is highly recommended that only one instance of Instructor Utilities is

open at a time.

6

Class Management

Class management functions are accessed by clicking one of the top two drawers of the filing

cabinet. Inside the drawer, there are several green hanging folders and manila folders within the

hanging folders. Each hanging folder represents a class (a collection of students), and each

manila folder represents a management function for the selected class. The class management

drawer is closed by clicking the bottom of the drawer where it is labeled close. Closing the

drawer brings the instructor back to the main stockroom.

Classes are selected by clicking the hanging folder label for the indicated class (which brings that

label forward). The green arrows to the left and right of the hanging folders cycle through the list

of classes six classes at a time. A new class is created by clicking the Add Class button in the

Class Roll folder. Details on adding and managing classes follow.

The manila folders in each hanging folder perform specific class management functions. A brief

description of each folder is given. Details are found in their respective help sections.

Figure 2. The Class Management drawer showing the Class Roll manila folder.

7

Class Roll. Add and delete classes; add, delete, and import students; specify usernames and

passwords; update to and retrieve from the web; assign stockroom access privileges.

Inorganic. Define and release assignments for the inorganic qualitative analysis laboratory.

Quantum. Define and release assignments for the quantum experiments.

Gases. Define and release assignments for the gases experiments.

Titration. Define and release assignments for the titration experiments.

Calorimetry. Define and release assignments for the calorimetry or thermodynamic experiments.

Mechanics. Define and release assignments for the mechanics experiments.

Density. Define and release assignments for the density experiments.

Circuits. Define and release assignments for electronic circuit experiments.

Optics. Define and release assignments for the optics experiments.

Organic. Define and release assignments for organic synthesis and organic qualitative analysis

experiments.

Scores. View scores assigned to each student for each assignment, export scores, view lab books,

and determine availability of lab books for grading.

Class Roll

Overview The class roll folder contains class and student information as well as functions for adding and

deleting classes and student records, importing student information, and defining access

privileges. (See Figure 2.) The folder is divided into three areas:

(1) class information

(2) function buttons

(3) a spreadsheet view of student records.

Details on the three areas of the folder are given in their respective sections below. An overview

of the routine or common functions performed in the class roll folder is described here.

Adding a Class. A new class is added by clicking the button in the Class Roll folder labeled Add

Class followed by filling in the Class Name, Section, and Instructor text boxes. Pressing Tab or

Enter automatically advances to the next text box. Pressing Tab or Enter in the Instructor text

8

box saves the class information. The laboratories that can be accessed by this class must also be

selected.

Adding Students. Students can be added individually by clicking the Add Member button or by

clicking in an empty row of the spreadsheet. Students can also be imported from a tab-delimited

text file.

Deleting a Class. The currently selected class can be deleted by clicking the Delete Class button.

Deleting Students. The currently highlighted member can be deleted by clicking the Delete

Member button.

Modifying Information. Class information or member information can be modified by clicking

the appropriate text box and typing the correction. The Save Class or Save Member button,

respectively, may be pressed to save the modified information.

Updating and Retrieving from the Web. If the Web Connectivity Option is being used, class data

(class lists, assignments, scores, etc.) for the currently selected class can be updated to the servlet

engine by clicking on the Update Web button. Student data is retrieved from the servlet engine

by clicking on the Retrieve Web button.

Note on Organizing Classes. Since only a few individuals require access to the stockroom to

make assignments and grade lab books, it is suggested that a separate administrative class be

created for those who require access to the stockroom. Selecting the Admin rights in the Rights

section of the spreadsheet grants access to the stockroom for the selected individual. Grading

rights are also available for individuals, which grants access only to the lab books for grading.

Class Information The class information area shows the class name, section number, instructor name, and the

selected (and available) laboratory experiments for the selected hanging folder. (See Figure 2.)

The class name, section number, and instructor can be modified by clicking the appropriate text

box. Pressing Tab or Enter advances the cursor to the next text box except after the instructor

box which, instead, saves the class information to the database. Pressing the Save Class button

also saves the class information to the database. It is not necessary to perform a Save Class when

selecting the experiments that will be available to the class. These changes are saved

automatically.

Function Buttons These buttons perform most of the class roll functionality and are shown in Figure 2. A detailed

description of these buttons is given next.

Save Class. This button is active when text is being entered or modified in the class information

text boxes. Pressing this button saves the currently entered information in all three text boxes.

Import Class. This button is used to import members into the currently selected class using a tab-

delimited text file. Clicking the button brings up a dialog box which allows the import file to be

9

located and selected. If errors are found during the import process, an error file is created (and

placed in the installed Y Science directory) and an appropriate error message is displayed. The

format of the import file is as follows:

Last First MI User Name Password Frog [Tab] Kermit [Tab] T [Tab] [Tab] green

Bird [Tab] Big [Tab] [Tab] [Tab] yellow

Grouch[Tab] Oscar [Tab] T [Tab] [Tab] dirty

Ernie [Tab] [Tab] [Tab] [Tab] ducky

Bert [Tab] [Tab] [Tab] [Tab] pigeon

Etc.

Only the last name and password are required with four [Tab]s on each line. Usernames are

created automatically (if the column is left blank) and middle names are truncated to initials

automatically. Class members that are imported are always given student access rights. An

import file can be easily created by importing a class list into a spreadsheet program, editing the

list to the preceding format, and saving the list as a tab-delimited text file.

Add Class. This button begins a new hanging folder for a new class.

Delete Class. This button deletes the currently selected class. A warning is given before the

deletion occurs.

Add Member. This button adds a member to the currently selected class. Text entry starts on the

left with the last name and proceeds to the right by pressing Tab or Enter. The mouse can also be

used to advance to the next field. Pressing Tab or Enter after the ID has been entered saves the

member automatically to the database. Pressing the Save Member button will also save the

member.

Save Member. When a new member is being added to a class or member information is being

modified, this button saves the current entries to the database.

Delete Member. This button deletes the currently selected member. A warning is given before

the deletion occurs.

Delete All. This button deletes all the members in the currently selected class without deleting

class information. A warning is given before the deletion occurs.

Retrieve Web. This button performs a Retrieve function from the servlet engine for the selected

class and automatically synchronizes the local database. If there is no new data to retrieve then a

warning is given. If the instructor proceeds to retrieve the data, then a force retrieve is done

which retrieves all the data from the server and synchronizes the local database replacing any

duplicate information. See the Web Tools folder in Utilities for more ways of retrieving data and

for specifying the URL address.

10

Update Web. This button performs an Update function to the servlet engine for the selected class.

If there is no new data to send, then a warning is given. If the instructor proceeds to update the

server, then a force update is done which replaces all the data on the server. Note that the Update

function must be performed before students can be authenticated over the web. The update

function must also be performed any time modifications are made to the class data in order to

provide the students in the class with the most up-to-date information.

Cancel. This button cancels text entry in any of the class information or member information text

boxes.

Help. This button accesses the help screen for class rolls.

Student Records The list of members for the class is given in the spreadsheet. Listed for each member is the last

name, first name, middle initial, username, password (usually the student ID), and administrative

privileges. A member can be added by clicking the Add Member button or by clicking on a blank

line in the spreadsheet. The last name and password are required for each member. The first

name and middle initial are optional. The username is generated automatically, but it can also be

specified. The username and password is used by the member to gain access to the different

laboratories in Y Science and must be unique to each member. Selecting Admin rights for a

member gives that person administrative privileges, which means they can enter the stockroom

and create, modify, and delete classes, students, and assignments. Selecting Grading rights for a

member gives that person grading privileges, which means they can enter the stockroom and

access the grading functionality in the lab books. A user with Grading rights does not have the

ability to enter the Class Management or Utilities functions.

When adding a member, text entry is started on the left with the last name and proceeds to the

right by pressing Tab or Enter. The mouse can also be used to advance to the next field. Pressing

Tab or Enter after the password has been entered saves the member automatically to the

database. Pressing the Save Member button will also save the member. The information for a

member can be modified by clicking the appropriate text box. The change is saved by pressing

Tab or Enter until the password is saved or by pressing the Save Member button. Scrolling

through the member list is accomplished using the scroll bar.

11

Inorganic Assignments

Overview The inorganic assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release inorganic qualitative

analysis unknowns to the class in the inorganic laboratory. These unknowns (or assignments) are

given to the students in the left slot of the unknown rack in the inorganic stockroom, and the

student’s work on these assignments is recorded (by the student) in the lab book. A new section

is created in the lab book for each assignment accepted by the student. A student reports their

unknown by pressing the Report button in the lab book and then selecting the cations they

determined to be present based on their analysis. After submitting their results, a score is

automatically computed by subtracting points for each incorrect positive or negative result. This

score can be changed at a later time if necessary.

Each unknown is made up of a set of cations that has been selected by the instructor and

constitutes the cations the students will be trying to separate and identify. The instructor can

assign unknowns to the students in four different ways, but the different types of unknowns only

differ by how the actual cations are assigned to the students. These four unknown types are

Figure 3. The Inorganic Assignment folder showing a Random/By Student assignment.

12

Random/By Class, Random/By Student, Manual/By Class, and Manual/By Student where

Random means the cations are assigned to the students randomly based on certain criterion,

Manual means the cations are assigned manually by the instructor, By Student means a different

unknown (but from the same set of cations) is assigned to each student, and By Class means each

student in the class receives the same unknown. As part of the assignment, the instructor must

also specify the total points possible, the number of points deducted per wrong answer, the date

the assignment will be available to the students (the start date), and the date when the assignment

is due.

The inorganic assignment folder is shown in Figure 3 and can be divided into three general areas:

(a) class information, (b) assignment/archive buttons, and (c) the assignment area. The following

details are on these three areas.

Class Information In the upper-left of the inorganic assignment folder is the class information area where

information on the currently selected class is given, followed by three buttons that are used to

create, retrieve, or archive inorganic assignments. Class information cannot be modified in this

folder.

Assignment/Archive Buttons Create New Assignment. This button creates a blank assignment, which can be defined by the

instructor and then released to the class. Details on defining an inorganic assignment are given in

the Assignments section.

Retrieve Assignment. This button retrieves an inorganic assignment from a set of assignments

that have been previously archived. Details on archiving and retrieving inorganic assignments

are given in the Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.

Archive Assignment. This button saves or archives the currently selected or defined inorganic

assignment. Details on archiving and retrieving inorganic assignments are given in the Archiving

and Retrieving Assignments section.

Assignments The general procedure for creating an assignment includes the following steps:

1. Create a blank assignment using the Create New Assignment button. (This is not necessary

if it is the first assignment.)

2. Enter a title for the assignment.

3. Specify the assignment as Random/By Class, Random/By Student, Manual/By Class, or

Manual/By Student.

4. Define the cation set.

5. Assign the unknowns as appropriate for the assignment type. (See #3.)

13

6. Assign the points possible, points for deductions, the start date, and the due date.

The assignment area can be divided into the following parts: (a) Assignment Number, (b)

Assignment Title, (c) Assignment Type, (d) Student List, (e) Cation Set, (f) Function Buttons,

and (g) Points, Deductions, Start Date, and Due Date. Each of these are described in the

following list:

(a) Assignment Number. The number of the current assignment is shown in the assignment

number box. Assignments that have already been created can be accessed using the left and

right arrows next to the box. It can take several seconds to update the assignment information

as each assignment is accessed. Rapidly advancing through the assignments bypasses the

assignment update for each intermediate assignment. The assignment number only reflects

the order in which they were created. The start date determines when they are accessible to

the students.

(b) Assignment Title. Each assignment must be given a title. The title is intended as an aid to

identify the type of unknown that has been assigned, and it is also used as the default name

when archiving the assignment. (See Archiving and Retrieving Assignments for details.)

Assignment titles are entered by clicking the text box and typing the appropriate text.

(c) Assignment Type. The type of assignment is selected by clicking the Create Unknown and

Assign Unknown drop-down menus. The Create Unknown menu allows the unknown to be

assigned Randomly or Manually, and the Assign Unknown menu allows the unknown to be

assigned By Student or By Class. The combination of these two drop-down menus yields the

four different types of unknowns: Random/By Class, Random/By Student, Manual/By Class,

or Manual/By Student.

(1) Random Assignment. In a Random assignment, the cations that have been selected for the

cation set (see Cation Set below) are assigned randomly based on the Minimum and

Maximum parameters. (See Figure 3.) The Minimum and Maximum parameters only

appear on the folder when a Random unknown has been selected. The Minimum

parameter defines the minimum number of cations that can be assigned from the cation

set. A “1” would indicate that no fewer than one cation would be present in the unknown

out of the cations in the cation set, a “2” would mean that no fewer than two cations

would be in the unknown, and so on. A special case of “0” (zero) is allowed and indicates

that no cations or a water unknown could be assigned. Similar to the Minimum parameter,

the Maximum parameter defines the maximum number of cations that can be assigned as

an unknown from the cation set. Some restrictions to these parameters include (i)

Maximum cannot be greater than the number of cations in the set and (ii) Minimum

cannot be greater than Maximum. The Minimum and Maximum parameters are adjusted

by clicking the up and down arrows next to each parameter.

(2) Manual Assignment. In a Manual assignment, an unknown is assigned by selecting the

cations for each unknown manually from the cations in the cation set. (See Cation Set.)

Cations are selected from the cation set by clicking the cation tiles in the Cation Set box.

14

(3) By Class. When an assignment is given by class, then every student in the class will

receive the same unknown. For a Random assignment, the unknown is randomly selected

from the cation set, and for a Manual assignment, the cations in the unknown are selected

manually.

(4) By Student. When an assignment is given by student, then every student in the class will

receive a unique unknown. For a Random assignment, each unknown is randomly

selected from the cation set, and for a Manual assignment, the cations in each unknown

are selected manually for each student.

(d) Student List. A student list (see Figure 3) is provided for By Student assignments, for making

Manual (or individual) assignments and to show the unknowns that have been assigned to

each student. The list shows three students. The middle student in the box is the currently

selected student, and there is a student before and after. Student names in red indicate an

assignment has not been given, whereas student names in blue indicate an assignment has

been given. The up and down arrows are used to scroll through the list. When an assignment

has been made (name in blue), the cations that have been assigned to that student are

highlighted in the Cation Set box. Changes in the assignments can be made up until the start

date.

(e) Cation Set. Before an unknown can be given to the students in the class, a cation set must be

defined. This is done by selecting cations from the Cation List and placing them in the Cation

Set box. Cations are selected clicking and dragging a cation tile from the list to the Cation Set

box. Cations can be removed from the Cation Set box and returned to the list by clicking and

dragging from the Cation Set to the Cation List. For Manual assignments, cations are

assigned from the Cation Set box by clicking once on the desired cation tiles. For a By Class

assignment, this cation selection process is only done once. For a By Student assignment, the

cation selection process must be done for each student. Pressing Save saves the assignment

for the indicated student (see Student List) and automatically advances the student list to the

next student. For a Random assignment, cations in the Cation Set box cannot be selected

manually, but once the assignment has been saved, the depressed tiles in the Cation Set box

indicate the cations that have been assigned to the class or to the indicated student.

(f) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save

button saves the current assignment. For Random assignments, pressing the Save button

actually assigns the unknowns to the class (By Class) or to each student (By Student). The

Cancel button resets the current assignment to a blank assignment if it has not yet been

saved; otherwise, it restores the assignment to its last saved state. The Delete button deletes

an assignment that has not been released, and the Help button opens the help window for

inorganic assignments.

(g) Points, Deductions, Start Date, and Due Date. The points, deductions, start date, and due

date for the assignment are specified in these text boxes. The points are the total numbers of

points assigned for the assignment, and the deductions are the numbers of points to be

deducted for each wrong answer by the student (either a false positive or false negative). The

15

minimum score possible is zero. By default, text entry starts in the title box and pressing Tab

or Enter advances the cursor to the points box, and then the deductions box. The start date is

the date (starting at midnight) the assignment will be available to the students, and the due

date is the last day the assignment will be available (ending at midnight). Enter the start date

and due date by clicking on the calendar icon in their respective boxes and choosing the

desired day. You may scroll between months by using the arrows on either side of the month

and year display at the top of the calendar box. An assignment cannot be modified, including

the start date, once it has been released to the students, but it is possible to change the due

date. An assignment can only be canceled while it is released by deleting it.

Archiving and Retrieving Assignments Defining an inorganic qualitative analysis unknown can be a time-consuming and laborious

process, especially if there are several unknowns and there are several classes for which these

unknowns need to be defined. To make this process less time consuming, inorganic assignments

can be archived, or saved, and then retrieved using the Archive Assignment and Retrieve

Assignment buttons.

To archive an assignment, define an inorganic assignment following the steps and procedures

that were described in the Assignments section. Pressing the Archive Assignment button will save

the cation set, the assignment type, the assignment title, the points, and the deductions. A dialog

box will come up asking for a name for the archive and where to save it. The assignment archive

can be stored anywhere, but the default location is the Assignment /Inorganic directory located

where the database is stored. Any number of archives can be stored with any combination of

unknowns.

To retrieve an assignment, an inorganic assignment must first be created. Pressing the Retrieve

Assignment button will bring up a dialog box where the instructor may select from any of the

available archives. Selecting an archive will automatically define the assignment based on the

information that was saved during the archive. At this point, the start date and due date for the

assignment must still be specified, and the actual unknowns must be assigned to the students by

saving the assignment (pressing the Save button) for a Random assignment or by selecting the

cations from the cation set for a Manual assignment.

16

Quantum Assignments

Overview The quantum assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release text-based instructions

(or assignments) for performing a number of simulated experiments that demonstrate many of

the concepts and ideas that led to the development of quantum mechanics. The level of these

experiments can be very basic or very sophisticated, depending on the level of the class and the

purpose for performing the experiments. These assignments are given to the students using the

clipboard in the quantum stockroom, and the student’s work on these assignments is recorded

(by the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab book for each assignment

accepted by the student.

The purpose of the quantum laboratory is to allow a student to explore and better understand the

foundational experiments that led up to the development of quantum mechanics. Because of the

very sophisticated nature of most of these experiments, the quantum laboratory is the most

“virtual” of the Y Science laboratory simulations. In general, the laboratory consists of an optics

Figure 4. The Quantum Assignments folder.

17

table where various sources, samples, modifiers, and detectors can be placed to perform different

experiments. These devices are located in the stockroom and can be taken out of the stockroom

and placed on the optics table. The emphasis here is to teach the students to probe a sample (e.g.,

a gas, metal foil, two-slit screen, etc.) with a source (e.g., a laser, electron gun, alpha-particle

source, etc.) and detect the outcome with a specific detector (a phosphor screen, spectrometer,

etc.). Heat, electric fields, or magnetic fields can also be applied to modify an aspect of the

experiment. As in all Y Science laboratories, the focus is to allow students the ability to explore

and discover, in a safe and level-appropriate setting, the concepts that are important in the

various areas of chemistry. Complete details on the quantum laboratory, its use and limitations,

and the scope of the simulations can be found in the Quantum Users Guide.

Because these physical chemistry experiments can be complex and not necessarily intuitive to set

up properly, a set of 15 preset experiments has been defined and is accessible to the student

through the clipboard in the stockroom. These preset experiments are defined using a set of INI

variables that describe the various aspects of each experiment. Details on how to change the

preset experiments are found in Appendix A. These preset experiments can also be turned off as

will be described later.

Assignments in the quantum laboratory consist of a set of instructions outlining what is required

of the students to complete the assignment. These assignments are text based, and when a student

accepts the assignment it is displayed on the clipboard. If the student decides to proceed, the

assignment is displayed in the laboratory TV for reference during the experiment. As installed,

the quantum simulation comes with a set of predefined assignments with varying levels of

difficulty. However, the number and difficulty of experiments that can be performed in the

quantum laboratory is enormous; therefore, the ability to import custom assignments and add

them to the database of assignments has also been provided. These custom assignments can also

include custom preset experiments.

Shown in Figure 4 is an example of a quantum assignment folder. The folder can be divided into

two general areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2) assignments. Details on these two areas of the

folder are given in their respective sections.

Laboratory Setup The laboratory setup area of the quantum assignment folder consists of a class information area

for the currently selected class at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options, followed by

three buttons that are used to create a new assignment, import a custom assignment, and delete a

custom assignment. Class information cannot be modified in this folder.

Preset Experiments. The clipboard in the quantum stockroom contains a list of 15 preset

experiments that the student can select to automatically set up experiments out in the laboratory.

Deselecting this option will turn off access to these preset experiments. Details on modifying the

preset experiments available to the students are found in Appendix A. This setting can be

changed at any time.

Highlight Drop Zones. When individual items of equipment are brought from the stockroom

counter to the optics table, there are specific positions that are allowed for each type of

18

equipment. To help the student see where these allowed drop zones are located, spotlights appear

on the optics table indicating the allowed positions as each item is dragged from the stockroom

counter and dropped on the optics table. Deselecting this setting turns off the spotlights. This

setting can be changed at any time.

Create New Assignment. This button creates a blank assignment that can be defined by the

instructor and then released to the class. Details on defining assignments are given in the

Assignments section.

Import Assignment. The Quantum laboratory comes with a set of predefined assignments with

varying levels of difficulty that demonstrate the concepts and ideas that led up to the

development of quantum mechanics (and beyond). However, it is recognized that the types of

experiments and their level of difficulty will most often need to be custom tailored for the level

of the class, the level of the students, and the individual teaching style of the instructor. This

button allows a custom assignment to be imported into the quantum assignment database.

Pressing the button brings up a dialog box, which allows the instructor to locate the new

assignment file and then bring it into the quantum assignment database. Once the file has been

successfully imported, it is not necessary to keep the original file. This import file must be a text-

(or ASCII-) based file with the following format:

[Assignment with a preset experiment]

1 Assignment Title 2

3 PRESET:preset_file.ini 4

5 Descriptive text of assignment without hard-returns except at paragraphs.

[Assignment without a preset experiment]



The first line is the assignment title and will be used to identify the assignment in the assignment

list (see Figure 4) and on the clipboard in the stockroom. The second line must be blank. The

third line is an optional line. If the word “PRESET:” is present on the third line followed by a

preset experiment file, then, when the assignment is accepted by the student, the preset

experiment will be set up automatically in the laboratory after exiting the stockroom. An

assignment does not necessarily have to have a preset assignment. It is only meant as an option

that allows different levels of experiments to be assigned to the students. If the PRESET: line is

missing then the third line in the text file is assumed to be the beginning of the assignment

description. If the PRESET: line is wrong or an invalid or missing file is found, the third line is

also interpreted as the beginning of the assignment description. Preset experiments for

assignments must be located in the Assignment/Quantum directory located in the installed Y

Science directory and must have the extension “.ini”. Note also that there should be no space

between the “PRESET:” and the file name. Details on defining preset experiments are found in

Appendix A, although several have been included with the software.

19

Delete Imported. This button will delete the currently selected assignment (displayed in the

assignment list) from the quantum assignment database if the selected assignment is an imported

assignment. Imported assignments are identified with an “*” after the title. A warning will be

given before the deletion is allowed to proceed.


1. If the desired assignment is not present in the quantum assignment database, write the

assignment using the format described and import the assignment.



3. Select the desired experiment using the Select Experiment drop-down list.

4. Assign the points possible, the start date, and the due date.

Shown in Figure 4 is the assignment area for a quantum assignment. The parts of the assignment

area are the following: (a) Assignment Number, (b) Select Experiment, (c) Description Box, (d)

Function Buttons, and (e) Points, Start Date, and Due Date. Each of these is described in the

following list:







the students.

(b) Select Experiment. The list of available experiments in the quantum assignment database is

contained in the Select Experiment drop-down list. Experiments are listed by title and sorted

alphabetically. Experiments with an “*” at the end are imported assignments and can be

deleted using the Delete Imported button. Experiments are selected by clicking the desired

experiment. Currently selected experiments can be replaced by clicking a new experiment.

(c) Description Box. The description box contains the text of the actual experiment for review.

No editing of the experiment description can be done in this box. If a preset experiment is

indicated as part of the experiment, it will also be listed here, but not shown to the student.

(d) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save

button saves the current assignment. The Cancel button resets the current assignment to a

blank assignment if it has not yet been saved; otherwise, it restores the assignment to its last

saved state. The Delete button deletes an assignment even if it has been released, and the

Help button opens the help window for quantum assignments.

20

(e) Points, Start Date, and Due Date. The points, start date, and due date for the assignment are

specified in these text boxes. The points are the total numbers of points assigned for the

assignment, and the minimum score possible is zero. The start date is the date (starting at

midnight) the assignment will be available to the students, and the due date is the last day the

assignment will be available (ending at midnight). Enter the start date and due date by

clicking on the calendar icon in their respective boxes and choosing the desired day. You

may scroll between months by using the arrows on either side of the month and year display

at the top of the calendar box. An assignment cannot be modified, including the start date,

once it has been released to the students, but it is possible to change the due date. An

assignment can only be canceled while it is released by deleting it.

Gases Assignments

Overview The gases assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release text-based instructions (or

assignments) for performing a set of simulated physical chemistry experiments that demonstrate

the behavior of ideal, real, and van der Waals gases under varying experimental conditions. The

Figure 5. The Gases Assignments folder.

21

level of these experiments can be very basic or very sophisticated, depending on the level of the

class and the purpose for performing the experiments. These assignments are given to the

students using the clipboard in the gases stockroom, and the student’s work on these assignments

is recorded (by the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab book for each

assignment accepted by the student.

The gas experiments included in the Y Science simulated laboratory allow students to explore

and better understand the behavior of ideal gases, real gases, and van der Waals gases (a model

real gas). The gases laboratory contains four experiments each of which includes the four

variables used to describe a gas: pressure (P), temperature (T), volume (V), and the number of

moles (n). The four experiments differ by allowing one of these variables to be the dependent

variable while the others are independent. The four experiments include (1) V as a function of P,

T, and n using a balloon to reflect the volume changes; (2) P as a function of V, T, and n using a

motor driven piston; (3) T as a function of P, V, and n again using a motor driven piston; and (4)

V as a function of P, T, and n but this time using a frictionless, massless piston to reflect volume

changes and using weights to apply pressure. The gases that can be used in these experiments

include an ideal gas; a van der Waals gas whose parameters can be changed to represent any real

gas; real gases including N2, CO2, CH4, H2O, NH3, and He; and eight ideal gases with different

molecular weights that can be added to the experiments to form gas mixtures. As in all Y Science

laboratories, the focus is to allow students the ability to explore and discover, in a safe and level-

appropriate setting, the concepts that are important in the various areas of chemistry. Complete

details on the gases laboratory, its use and limitations, and the scope of the simulations can be

found in the Gases Users Guide.

Because these gas experiments can be complex and not necessarily intuitive to set up properly, a

set of 15 preset experiments has been defined and is accessible to the student through the

clipboard in the stockroom. These preset experiments are defined using a set of INI variables that

describe the various aspects of each experiment. Details on how to change the preset experiments

are found in Appendix A. These preset experiments can also be turned off as will be described

later.

Assignments in the gases laboratory consist of a set of instructions outlining what is required of

the students to complete the assignment. These assignments are text based, and when a student



Gases comes with a set of predefined assignments with varying levels of difficulty. However, the

number and difficulty of experiments that can be performed in the gases laboratory is large;

therefore, the ability to import custom assignments and add them to the database of assignments

has also been provided. These custom assignments can also include custom preset experiments.

Shown in Figure 5 is an example of a gases assignment folder. The folder can be divided into

two general areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2) assignments. Details on these two areas of the

folder are given in their respective sections.

22

Laboratory Setup The laboratory setup area of the gases assignment folder consists of a class information area for

the currently selected class at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options, followed by three

buttons that are used to create a new assignment, import a custom assignment, and delete a

custom assignment. Class information cannot be modified in this folder.

Preset Experiments. The clipboard in the gases stockroom contains a list of 15 preset





van der Waals Parameters. One of the gases available in the gases laboratory is a van der Waals

gas. The a and b parameters used to define the van der Waals gas can be changed in the

laboratory by clicking on the cylinder label. Changing the a and b parameters here on the

assignment folder will change the default values that will be initially set for each student in the

class as they enter the laboratory. The units for the a and b parameters are as specified on the

folder.

Units. The units for the pressure, volume, and temperature variables can be changed at will by

the student using the Units buttons located on the LCD controllers. Specifying the units here on

the assignment folder will change the default units that will be initially used on the LCD

controllers for each experiment.




Import Assignment. The gases laboratory comes with a set of predefined assignments with

varying levels of difficulty that demonstrate the behavior of ideal, real, and van der Waals gases

under varying experimental conditions. However, it is recognized that the types of experiments

and their level of difficulty will most often need to be custom tailored for the level of the class,

the level of the students, and the individual teaching style of the instructor. This button allows a

custom assignment to be imported into the gases assignment database. Pressing the button brings

up a dialog box, which allows the instructor to locate the new assignment file and then bring it

into the gases assignment database. Once the file has been successfully imported, it is not

necessary to keep the original file. This import file must be a text- (or ASCII-) based file with the

following format:





23





list (see Figure 5) and on the clipboard in the stockroom. The second line must be blank. The

third line is an optional line. If the word “PRESET:” is present on the third line followed by a

preset experiment file, then, when the assignment is accepted by the student, the preset

experiment will be set up automatically in the laboratory after exiting the stockroom. An

assignment does not necessarily have to have a preset assignment. It is only meant as an option

that allows different levels of experiments to be assigned to the students. If the PRESET: line is

missing then the third line in the text file is assumed to be the beginning of the assignment

description. If the PRESET: line is wrong or an invalid or missing file is found, the third line is

also interpreted as the beginning of the assignment description. Preset experiments for

assignments must be located in the Assignment/Gases directory located in the installed Y Science

directory and must have the extension “.ini”. Note also that there should be no space between the

“PRESET:” and the file name. Details on defining preset experiments are found in Appendix A,

although several have been included with the software.


assignment list) from the gases assignment database if the selected assignment is an imported




1. If the desired assignment is not present in the gases assignment database, write the

assignment using the format described and import the assignment.





Shown in Figure 5 is the assignment area for a gases assignment. The parts of the assignment

area are the following: (a) Assignment Number, (b) Select Experiment, (c) Description Box, (d)

Function Buttons, and (e) Points, Start Date, and Due Date. Each of these is described in the

following list:





24



the students.

(b) Select Experiment. The list of available experiments in the gases assignment database is

contained in the Select Experiment drop-down list. Experiments are listed by title and sorted






indicated as part of the experiment, it will also be listed here, but not displayed to the student

when they read the description in the lab.





Help button opens the help window for quantum assignments.











Titration Assignments

Overview The titration assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release acid-base or

potentiometric assignments to classes using the titration laboratory. Titration assignments consist

of acids and/or bases or potentiometric reagents of unknown concentration. When an assignment

is released to the students, the bottles containing the unknowns will be located on the left side of

the “Unknowns” shelf in the titration stockroom, and upon accepting the assignment the

student’s work on these assignments will be recorded by the student in the lab book. A new

section is created in the lab book for each assignment accepted by the student. The students

report their assignments by clicking on the Report button in the lab book and then entering the

concentrations of the unknowns they were assigned using data gathered from their experimental

work and calculations. After submitting their results, a score can be automatically assigned based

on pre-defined automatic grading criteria. This score can be changed at a later time if necessary.

25

The virtual titration laboratory allows students to perform precise, quantitative titrations

involving acid-base and electrochemical reactions. The available laboratory equipment consists

of a 50 mL buret, 5, 10, and 25 mL pipets, graduated cylinders, beakers, a stir plate, a set of 8

acid-base indicators, a pH meter/voltmeter, a conductivity meter, and an analytical balance for

weighing out solids. Acid-base titrations can be performed on any combination of mono-, di-,

and tri-protic acids and mono-, di-, and tri-basic bases. The pH of these titrations can be

monitored using a pH meter, an indicator, and a conductivity meter, all as a function of volume,

and this data can be saved to an electronic lab book for later analysis. A smaller set of

potentiometric titrations can also be performed. Systematic and random errors in the mass and

volume measurements have been included in the simulation by introducing buoyancy errors in

the mass weighings, volumetric errors in the glassware, and characteristic systematic and random

errors in the pH/voltmeter and conductivity meter output. These errors can be ignored, which

will produce results and errors typical of high school or freshman-level laboratory work, or the

buoyancy and volumetric errors can be measured and included in the calculations to produce

results better than 0.1% in accuracy and reproducibility.

Figure 6. The Titration Assignments folder.

26

Because these titration experiments include a significant amount of detail, a set of 15 preset

experiments has been defined and is accessible to the student through the clipboard in the

stockroom. These preset experiments are defined using a set of INI variables that describe the

various aspects of each experiment. Details on how to change the preset experiments are found in

Appendix A. These preset experiments can also be turned off which will be described later.

The titration laboratory allows both acid-base and potentiometric titrations, however assignments

for each type of titration are essentially the same. A titration assignment consists of (1) selecting

the reagents that will be assigned to the students, (2) specifying the reagents as known or

unknown, (3) specifying the concentrations of the reagents, and (4) selecting and defining the

reagents on the stockroom shelves that will be available to the student during the assignment.

When a titration assignment has been released, the assigned reagents (usually unknowns) will

appear on the left side of the “Unknowns” shelf in the stockroom. Selecting some or all of these

reagents will constitute accepting the assignment, which will then cause the reagent bottles

available in the stockroom to be reconfigured as defined in the assignment. The student now

proceeds with the titration experiment and reports their results using the lab book.

The titration assignment folder is divided into two areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2)

assignments. Details on these two areas of the folder and on defining a titration assignment are

given below.

Laboratory Setup Shown in Figure 6 is the laboratory setup area of the titration assignment folder. Information on

the currently selected class is given at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options, followed

by three buttons that are used to create assignments and retrieve or archive titration assignments.

Class information cannot be modified in this folder. It should be noted that the settings specified

in this area of the titration folder apply to the selected class as a whole and not to a given

assignment.

Allow Presets. The clipboard in the titration stockroom contains a list of 15 preset experiments

that the student can select to automatically set up experiments out in the laboratory or to assign a

set of pre-defined unknowns. Answers for the unknowns are given in the titration section of the

Instructor’s Manual. Deselecting this option will turn off access to these preset experiments.

Details on modifying the preset experiments available to the students are found in Appendix A.

This setting can be changed at any time.

Auto save and graphing. In the titration laboratory, students have the ability to save the data

associated with a titration (volume, pH/voltage, and conductivity) to the lab book for later

analysis and to view a graph of the pH/voltage and conductivity as a function of volume during

the course of the titration. This ability to save titration data to the lab book includes

automatically reading the volume of titrant delivered from the buret. Deselecting this option will

prevent students from saving titration data to the lab book and from monitoring the titration

using the graphing function. Students will be forced to manually read the buret and record the

necessary data to the lab book.

Activity coefficients. In order to achieve the most accurate calculations of pH and voltage for the

titrations, activity coefficients, as calculated from the extended Debye-Huckle limiting law, are

27

used in the equilibrium calculations. Deselecting this option will turn off the use of activity

coefficients. Turning off activity coefficients may be useful when students are expected to

perform their own equilibrium calculations and compare them to the results from the virtual

laboratory. Students also have the ability to turn activity coefficients on or off in the stockroom.

Glassware errors. Actual volumetric burets and pipets do not deliver volumes that correspond

exactly to the scale etched on the barrel. These volumetric errors are simulated in the laboratory

by assigning appropriate error functions to each piece of precision glassware available in the

laboratory. These glassware errors are unique to each student but remain constant over time.

Deselecting this option will turn off these error functions, and the buret and pipets will deliver

the volumes as indicated.

Buoyancy errors. Items that are weighed on a balance under standard air pressure are buoyed up

by the air causing the observed mass, as displayed by the balance, to be different than the true

mass. This buoyancy correction is small but does make a statistically significant contribution

when accuracies approaching 0.1% are needed. The mass readings displayed on the analytical

balance in the simulation are observed masses and have been reverse corrected from the true

mass. The balance will give the true mass when this option is deselected.

Base Barometric Pressure. The buoyancy errors applied to the balance readings require

knowledge of the density of air among other things. The density of air can be calculated using a

variety of methods, but each requires knowledge of the temperature and barometric pressure.

Therefore, in order to correct for buoyancy errors, the student must know the current temperature

and barometric pressure in the virtual laboratory. The temperature is constant at 25°C, but the

barometric pressure is assigned a new random value every day. The base or average pressure

used for assigning the daily barometric pressure is specified here. The swing in pressures that can

be assigned for any given day is ±20 Torr around the indicated base pressure.




Retrieve Assignment. This button retrieves a titration assignment from a set of assignments that

have been previously archived. Details on archiving and retrieving titration assignments are

given in the Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.

Archive Assignment. This button saves or archives the currently selected titration assignment.

Details on archiving and retrieving qualitative analysis assignments are given in the Archiving

and Retrieving Assignments section.




28


3. Specify the assignment as Acid/base or Potentiometric

4. Select reagents for the assignment shelf.

5. Specify the assignment as By Class or By Student.

6. Type or paste assignment instructions.

7. Define the stockroom reagents that will be available during the assignment.

8. Assign the points possible, auto-grading criterion, the start date, and the due date.

The assignment area can be divided into two general areas, each accessed by clicking on their

respective tab on the left: (1) The assignment area and (2) The stockroom shelves (the Acid/Base

or Potentiometric tab). The assignment area is used to define the major portions of the

assignment including the unknowns, points possible, grading, start date, and due date. The

stockroom shelves (either Acid/Base or Potentiometric) area is used to define the stockroom

reagents that will be available during the assignment. Details for each area are given below.

The Assignment Tab (a) Assignment Number. The number of the current assignment is shown in the assignment






the students.


identify the type of unknown that has been assigned, and it is also used as the default name

when archiving the assignment. (See Archiving and Retrieving Assignments for details.)

Assignment titles are entered by clicking on the text box and typing the appropriate text.

(c) Assignment Type. Titration assignments can be either Acid/base or Potentiometric. An

assignment is defined as Acid/base or Potentiometric by clicking on the appropriate radio

button. The default assignment type is Acid/base.

(d) Assignment Shelf. A titration assignment can consist of up to three reagent bottles usually

representing unknowns that will appear on the “Unknowns” shelf in the stockroom. For acid-

base assignments, two of these bottles can be any combination of acids and/or bases and the

third can be an inert salt. For potentiometric assignments, there can only be two bottles, one

of which must be an oxidant and the other a reductant. The third bottle is not allowed. The

three buttons in the Assignment area represent the three reagents that can be assigned as an

unknown. The first two buttons are used to select the acids and/or bases for an acid-base

29

assignment or the oxidant and reductant for a potentiometric assignment, while the third

button is for the inert salt. An “x” in the box on each button indicates that a reagent has been

selected for that position on the “Unknowns” shelf, and the name of the selected reagent will

be labeled on the button.

Clicking on a reagent button will bring up a dialog box where (1) the reagent to be assigned

to that bottle can be selected from a dropdown list, (2) the concentration for the reagent can

be specified as Fixed or Random, and (3) the concentration will be labeled as Known or

Unknown to the student. A Fixed concentration means that the concentration to be assigned

to that bottle will be constant and the same for each student. A Random concentration

indicates that the concentration will be assigned randomly within a concentration range

specified by a minimum and maximum concentration. A Random unknown or known can be

assigned for the class or uniquely for each student (see Unknown Type below). Note that

concentrations for aqueous reagents are specified in molarity and the concentrations for

solids are in weight percent. Clicking on the dropdown arrow to the left of the Assignment

Shelf buttons will drop down the details (concentration, unknown type, and its known or

unknown designation) associated with each assigned reagent.

(e) Unknown Type. Concentrations for bottles on the Assignment Shelf and on the stockroom

shelves can be specified manually (Fixed) or they can be assigned randomly. Fixed

concentrations are the same for each student in the class, but concentrations assigned

Randomly can be the same or unique for each student. The Assign Unknown dropdown list

allows the concentrations that are generated randomly to be the same for the entire class (By

Class) or to be unique for each student (By Student).

(f) Student List. A student list (not shown in Figure 6 but an example can be seen in Figure 3) is

provided for By Student assignments to show the unknowns that have been assigned to each

student. The list shows three students. The middle student in the box is the currently selected

student, and there is a student before and after. Student names in red indicate an assignment

has not been given, whereas student names in blue indicate an assignment has been given.

The up and down arrows are used to scroll through the list. When an assignment has been

made (name in blue), the concentrations that have been assigned to that student are given in

the reagent bottle drop down list. Changes in the assignments can be made up until the start

date.

(g) Tools Available. In titration experiments, the equivalence point can be determined using

various techniques. For acid-base titrations, a pH meter, indicators, and a conductivity meter

are available. For potentiometric titrations, a voltmeter and a conductivity meter are

available. The Tools Available section is used to specify which of the allowed techniques

will be available for an assignment. The default is all that all techniques are available.

(h) Assignment Instructions. As part of an assignment, it is possible to include instructions for

the student to use as they do their experimental work. These instructions are not a mandatory

part of the assignment but are optional depending on the level of guidance that is needed for

a particular assignment. Instructions are simply typed or pasted into the Instructions text box.

These instructions will be available for viewing on the clipboard in the stockroom when

30

assigned unknowns are on the “Unknowns” shelf, and they will be available on the TV in the

laboratory after an assignment has been accepted.

(i) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save

button saves the current assignment. For Random assignments, pressing the Save button

assigns the unknowns to the class (By Class) or to each student (By Student). The Cancel

button resets the current assignment to a blank assignment if it has not yet been saved;

otherwise, it restores the assignment to its last saved state. The Delete button deletes an

assignment even if it has been released, and the Help button opens the help window for

titration assignments.

(j) Points and Auto-grading. Scoring for an assignment is specified in these boxes. The points

are the total number of points possible for the assignment. The Auto-grade check box is used

to turn on auto-grading. If auto-grading is turned off, then it is the instructor’s responsibility

to inspect the student’s results and assign a score (see Grading). If auto-grading is turned on,

then the % Error and Deduct values must be included as part of the assignment. Auto-grading

works by subtracting the number of points specified in the Deduct box from the total points

possible for every interval the student’s answer is outside the range specified in % Error. For

example, using the % Error of 1 and a Deduct value of 2 shown in Figure 6, if the student’s

answer were wrong by 2.2%, 4 points would be deducted. If two unknowns are assigned,

then both will be used to deduct points. The minimum score possible is zero.

(k) Start Date and Due Date. The start date and due date are used to specify when an assignment

will be available for the class. By default, text entry starts in the title box and pressing Tab or

Enter advances the cursor to the points box, and then the deductions box. The start date is the

date (starting at midnight) the assignment will be available to the students, and the due date is

the last day the assignment will be available (ending at midnight). Enter the start date and

due date by clicking on the calendar icon in their respective boxes and choosing the desired

day. You may scroll between months by using the arrows on either side of the month and

year display at the top of the calendar box. An assignment cannot be modified, including the

start date, once it has been released to the students, but it is possible to change the due date.

An assignment can only be canceled while it is released by deleting it.

The Stockroom Shelves The stockroom shelves tab in the assignment area will be labeled as either Acid/Base or

Potentiometric depending on the type of assignment that has been selected. Clicking on the tab

will bring the user to a series of buttons, each of which represents a bottle on the stockroom

shelves (see Figure 7). For acid-base assignments, there will be a set of buttons for the acid shelf,

the bases shelf, and the inert salts. For potentiometric assignments, there will be a set of buttons

for the oxidants and for the reductants. The purpose of these buttons is to allow each bottle on

the stockroom shelves to be reconfigured as necessary for the assignment defined in the

assignment area. Reagents can be deselected so they will not be available for students during the

assignment, concentrations can be changed, and concentrations can be converted into unknowns

(although these unknowns cannot be reported and graded as part of the assignment). Combined

with the unknowns that are assigned on the “Unknowns” shelf, the ability to reconfigure the

31

reagents on the stockroom shelves provides an enormous amount of flexibility for the level of

assignments.

Clicking on a reagent button will bring up a dialog box where (1) the reagent availability can be

deselected (the default state is all reagents are available), (2) the concentration for the reagent

can be specified as Fixed or Random, and (3) the concentration is Known or Unknown to the

student. An “x” in the box on each button indicates that a reagent is available for the assignment.

A Fixed concentration means that the concentration to be assigned to that bottle will be constant

and the same for each student. A Random concentration indicates that the concentration will be

assigned randomly within a concentration range specified by a minimum and maximum

concentration. A Random unknown or known can be assigned for the class or uniquely for each

student. Note that concentrations for aqueous reagents are specified in molarity and the

concentrations for solids are in weight percent. Clicking on the dropdown arrow to the left of the

buttons will drop down the details (concentration, unknown type, and its known or unknown

designation) associated with each reagent.

Figure 7. The stockroom shelves definition area in the Titration Assignment folder. Shown

here are the buttons to define an acid-base assignment.

32

Archiving and Retrieving Assignments Defining a titration assignment can be a time-consuming and laborious process, especially if

there are several unknowns and there are several classes for which these unknowns need to be

defined. To make this process less time consuming, titration assignments can be archived, or

saved, and then retrieved using the Archive Assignment and Retrieve Assignment buttons.

To archive an assignment, define a titration assignment following the steps and procedures that

were described in the Assignments section. Pressing the Archive Assignment button will save the

entire assignment except the start date and due date. A dialog box will come up asking for a

name for the archive and where to save it. The assignment archive can be stored anywhere, but

the default location is the Assignment/Titrations directory located where the database is stored.

Any number of archives can be stored with any combination of unknowns.

An assignment is retrieved by clicking on the Retrieve Assignment button, which will bring up a

dialog box where the instructor may select from any of the available archives. Selecting an

archive will automatically define the assignment based on the information that was saved during

the archive. At this point, the start date and due date for the assignment must still be specified,

and the actual unknowns must be assigned to the students by saving the assignment (pressing the

Save button). It is not necessary that a new assignment be created first before retrieving an

archive.

Calorimetry Assignments

Overview The calorimetry assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release text-based

instructions (or assignments) for performing a set of simulated calorimetry experiments that

demonstrate the concepts important in the study of chemical thermodynamics. The level of these



clipboard in the calorimetry stockroom, and the student’s work on these assignments is recorded

(by the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab book for each assignment

accepted by the student.

There are three different calorimeters in the virtual calorimetry laboratory that allow students to

measure various thermodynamic processes including heats of combustion, heats of solution,

heats of reaction, the heat capacity, and the heat of fusion. The calorimeters provided in the

simulations are a classic “coffee cup” calorimeter, a Dewar flask, and a bomb calorimeter. The

calorimetric method used in each calorimeter is based on measuring the temperature change in

the calorimeter caused by the different thermodynamic processes. Instructors can choose from a

wide selection of organic materials to measure the heats of combustion; salts to measure the

heats of solution; acids and bases for heats of reaction; metals and alloys for heat capacity

measurements; and ice for a melting process. Boiling point elevation and freezing point

depressions can also be assigned to be measured. Systematic and random errors in the mass and

volume measurements have been included in the simulation by introducing buoyancy errors in

the mass weighing, volumetric errors in the glassware, and characteristic systematic and random

errors in the thermometer measurements.

33

Because these calorimetry experiments can be complex and not necessarily intuitive to set up

properly, a set of 15 preset experiments has been defined and is accessible to the student through

the clipboard in the stockroom. These preset experiments are defined using a set of INI variables

that describe the various aspects of each experiment. Details on how to change the preset

experiments are found in Appendix A. These preset experiments can also be turned off as will be

described later.

The calorimetry laboratory is used for measurements of the heat of combustion, the heat of

solution, the heat capacity of a metal, and the heat of reaction, however assignments for each

type of calorimetry experiment are essentially the same. A calorimetry assignment consists of (1)

selecting the type of measurement to be assigned (organic, salt, metal, reaction), (2) selecting the

reagents or metals that will be assigned to the students, (3) specifying the reagents as knowns or

unknowns, (4) specifying the points and grading option, and (5) specifying the start date and due

date. When a calorimetry assignment has been released, the assigned reagents or metals will

appear on the left side of the “Unknowns” shelf in the stockroom. Selecting one or all of these

Figure 8. The Calorimetry Assignments folder.

34

reagents or metals will constitute accepting the assignment. The student now proceeds with the

calorimetry experiment and reports their results using the lab book.

The calorimetry assignment folder is divided into two areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2)

assignments. Details on these two areas of the folder and on defining a calorimetry assignment

are given below.

Laboratory Setup Shown in Figure 8 is the laboratory setup area of the calorimetry assignment folder. Information

on the currently selected class is given at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options,

followed by three buttons that are used to create assignments and retrieve or archive calorimetry

assignments. Class information cannot be modified in this folder. It should be remembered that

the settings specified in this area of the calorimetry folder apply to the selected class as a whole

and not to a given assignment.

Allow preset experiments. The clipboard in the calorimetry stockroom contains a list of 15 preset





Auto save and graphing. In the calorimetry laboratory, students have the ability to save the

temperature versus time data from the thermometer to the lab book for later analysis and to view

a graph of the temperature as a function of time during the course of an experiment. Deselecting

this option will prevent students from saving temperature data to the lab book and from

monitoring the temperature using the graphing function. Students will be forced to manually

monitor and record the temperature in the lab book.

Glassware errors. Actual graduated cylinders do not deliver volumes that correspond exactly to

the scale etched on the cylinder. These volumetric errors are simulated in the laboratory by

assigning appropriate error functions to each piece of glassware available in the laboratory.

Deselecting this option will turn off these error functions, and the graduated cylinders will

deliver the volumes as indicated.

Buoyancy errors. Items that are weighed on a balance in air are buoyed up by the air causing the

observed mass, as displayed by the balance, to be different than the true mass. This buoyancy

correction is small but does make a statistically significant contribution when accuracies

approaching 0.1% are needed. The mass readings displayed on the analytical balance in the

simulation are observed masses and have been reverse corrected from the true mass. The balance

will give the true mass when this option is deselected.

Base Barometric Pressure. The buoyancy errors applied to the balance readings require

knowledge of the density of air among other things. The density of air can be calculated using a

variety of methods, but each requires knowledge of the temperature and barometric pressure.

Therefore, in order to correct for buoyancy errors, the student must know the current temperature

and barometric pressure in the virtual laboratory. The temperature is constant at 25°C, but the

35

barometric pressure is assigned a new random value every day. The base or average pressure

used for assigning the daily barometric pressure is specified here. The swing in pressures that can

be assigned for any given day is ±20 Torr around the indicated base pressure.




Retrieve Assignment. This button retrieves a calorimetry assignment from a set of assignments

that have been previously archived. Details on archiving and retrieving calorimetry assignments

are given in the Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.

Archive Assignment. This button saves or archives the currently selected calorimetry assignment.

Details on archiving and retrieving calorimetry assignments are given in the Archiving and

Retrieving Assignments section.





3. Specify the assignment type as Organics (combustion), Salts (solution), Metals (heat

capacity), or Reactions.

4. Select the reagents or metals for the assignment shelf.




Shown in Figure 8 is the assignment area for a calorimetry assignment. The parts of the

assignment area are the following: (a) Assignment Number, (b) Assignment Title, (c)

Assignment Type, (d) Report In, (e) Assignment Shelf, (f) Auto-Grade and Points, (g) Assign

Unknown, (h) Student List, (i) Assignment Instructions, (j) Function Buttons, and (k) Start date

and Due Date. Each of these is described in the following list:






36


the students.


identify the type of measurement that has been assigned, and it is also used as the default

name when archiving the assignment. (See Archiving and Retrieving Assignments for

details.) Assignment titles are entered by clicking on the text box and typing the appropriate

text.

(c) Assignment Type. The type of measurement that can be assigned for a calorimetry assignment

includes the heat of combustion (Organics), the heat of solution (Salts), the heat capacity of a

metal (Metals), or the heat of reaction (Reactions). The assignment type is selected by

clicking on the appropriate radio button. The default assignment type is Organics (heat of

combustion).

(d) Report In. When reporting the enthalpy or heat capacity for the selected assignment type, the

answers can be reported per mole or per gram. For reagents that are assigned as unknowns

(allowed only for Organics, Salts, and Metals), reporting answers per gram is the only option.

For reactions, answers are reported per mole of the first reagent. The default unit is per mole.

(e) Assignment Shelf. The assignment shelf is used to specify the reagents or metals that will be

available for students on the “Unknowns” shelf in the stockroom for the selected assignment

type. For Organics, Salts, and Metals, up to two reagents or metals can be selected, but for

Reaction assignments only one reaction pair can be selected. If two reagents or metals are

assigned, then the heat or heat capacity of both must be reported for the assignment. For By

Class assignments, the same reagents or metals will be given to each student in the class. For

By Student assignments, the reagents or metals must be selected individually for each

student. If the Unknown box is checked, then the identity of the reagents or metals will be

hidden from the students (not available for Reaction assignments).

(f) Auto-Grade and Points. Scoring for an assignment is specified in these boxes. The points are

the total number of points possible for the assignment. The Auto-grade check box is used to

turn on auto-grading. If auto-grading is turned off, then it is the instructor’s responsibility to

inspect the student’s results and assign a score (see Grading). If auto-grading is turned on,

then the % Error and Deduct values must be included as part of the assignment. Auto-grading




answer were wrong by 2.5%, then the student would lose 4 points. If two unknowns are

assigned, then both will be used to deduct points. The minimum score possible is zero. The

Compare to option specifies if the reported answers will be compared to the standard state

value or to the non-standard state value actually used in the simulation. This option is only

available when Auto-Grade has been selected.

(g) Assign Unknown. Assignments can be given to students either By Class or By Student. In a

By Class assignment, each student in the class will receive the same reagents or metals. In a

37

By Student assignment, the reagents or metals can be different for each student, but the

reagents or metals must be assigned manually to each student. By default, assignments are

defined By Class.

(h) Student List. A student list (see Figure 8) is provided for By Student assignments to show the

reagents that have been assigned to each student. The list shows three students. The middle

student in the box is the currently selected student, and there is a student before and after.

Student names in red indicate an assignment has not been given, whereas student names in

blue indicate an assignment has been given. The up and down arrows are used to scroll

through the list. When an assignment has been made (name in blue), the reagents that have

been assigned to that student are given in the drop down list. Changes in the assignments can

be made up until the start date.

(i) Assignment Instructions. As part of an assignment, it is possible to include instructions for




These instructions will be available for viewing on the clipboard in the stockroom when

assigned unknowns are on the “Unknowns” shelf, and they will be available on the TV in the

laboratory after an assignment has been accepted.

(j) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save

button saves the current assignment. For By Student assignments, pressing the Save button

saves the assignment for the selected student only. The Cancel button resets the current

assignment to a blank assignment if it has not yet been saved; otherwise, it restores the

assignment to its last saved state. The Delete button deletes an assignment even if it has been

released, and the Help button opens the help window for calorimetry assignments.

(k) Start Date and Due Date. The start date and due date are used to specify when an assignment










Archiving and Retrieving Assignments Defining a calorimetry assignment can be a time-consuming and laborious process, especially if

there are several assignments and there are several classes for which these assignments need to

be defined. To make this process less time consuming, calorimetry assignments can be archived,

or saved, and then retrieved using the Archive Assignment and Retrieve Assignment buttons.

38

To archive an assignment, define a calorimetry assignment following the steps and procedures

that were described in the Assignments section. Pressing the Archive Assignment button will save

the entire assignment except the start date and due date. A dialog box will come up asking for a


the default location is the Assignment/Calorimetry directory located where the database is stored.

Any number of archives can be stored with any combination of assignments.





and the actual reagents must be assigned to the students by saving the assignment (pressing the


archive.

Mechanics, Circuits, and Optics Assignments

Overview The mechanics, circuits, and optics assignment folders allow the instructor to define and release

text-based instructions (or assignments) for performing a set of simulated physics experiments

that demonstrate the concepts of mechanics, electrical circuits, and optics. The level of these



clipboard found in each laboratory, and the student’s work on these assignments is recorded (by

the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab book for each assignment

accepted by the student. Although Mechanics, Circuits, and Optics each have their own

assignment folders, the method for delivering these assignments is essentially identical and will

be described together here.

There are five different types of experiments within the mechanics simulation: Free Motion,

Ramp Motion, Billiards Ball Motion, Falling Rod Rotational Motion, and Planetary Motion.

Each experiment operates within the general framework of the lab and many of the same objects

and forces are used with each type of experiment. The circuit laboratory allows students to build

circuits using either a breadboard or schematic representation. Using the breadboard students

will connect components as they would in an ordinary circuit laboratory by adding resistors, light

bulbs, capacitors, or inductors of any combination and a battery or function generator. When

using the schematic the students can “draw” a circuit schematic on paper as they would to plan a

circuit. The optics laboratory allows students to use lenses and mirrors to modify the images of

various objects and light sources and view the results with a virtual eye. The physics of color can

also be explored using filters and prisms. As in all Y Science laboratories, the focus is to allow

students the ability to explore and discover, in a safe and level-appropriate setting, the concepts

that form the foundation of classical physics. Complete details on these laboratories, their uses

and limitations, and the scope of the simulations can be found in the Mechanics, Circuits, or

Optics Users Guide.

39

Because these physics experiments can be complex and not necessarily intuitive to set up

properly, a set of 15 preset experiments for each of these simulations have been defined and are

accessible to the student through the clipboard found in each laboratory. These preset

experiments are defined using a set of INI variables that describe the various aspects of each

experiment. Details on how to change the preset experiments are found in Appendix A. These

preset experiments can also be turned off as will be described later.

Assignments in these laboratories consist of a set of instructions outlining what is required of the

students to complete the assignment. These assignments are text based, and when a student



Mechanics, Circuits, or Optics come with a set of predefined assignments with varying levels of

difficulty. However, the number and difficulty of experiments that can be performed in the

laboratories are large; therefore, the ability to import custom assignments and add them to the

database of assignments has also been provided. These custom assignments can also include

custom preset experiments.

Figure 9. The Mechanics Assignments folder. The assignment folders for Circuits and Optics

are identical except for the sidebar options.

40

Shown in Figure 9 is an example of a mechanics assignment folder. Assignment folders for

Circuits and Optics are similar. The folder can be divided into two general areas: (1) laboratory

setup and (2) assignments. Details on these two areas of the folder are given in their respective

sections.

Laboratory Setup The laboratory setup area of the assignment folder consists of a class information area for the

currently selected class at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options, followed by three

buttons that are used to create a new assignment, import a custom assignment, and delete a

custom assignment. Class information cannot be modified in this folder. The laboratory setup

options are unique to each laboratory simulation.

Preset Experiments. (All) The clipboard found in each laboratory contains a list of 15 preset





Ideal Wires. (Circuits) In the circuit laboratory, wires can be either ideal or non-ideal. Ideal

means they connect the nodes and contribute no resistance to the circuit. Non-ideal means they

are assumed to have some small resistance as every real wire does. Deselecting this option turns

off ideal wires.

Ideal Components. (Circuits) Resistors, capacitors, and inductors can be treated as ideal or non-

ideal components. Ideal means the stated value of the component is the actual value. For non-

ideal or real components a tolerance can be set such that the value of the component is randomly

assigned to be within a certain chosen range as occurs for real components. Deselecting this

option turns off ideal components.

Show Component Values. (Circuits) For a circuit built on the breadboard, mousing over each

component will show its nominal value, and for the engineering paper the component values are

displayed next to each component. Deselecting this option will hide the component values to

force a measurement or a calculation of the component values.

Display in Centimeters. (Optics) In the optics laboratory, the units for the various objects can be

displayed in centimeters or inches. Deselecting this option will display the units in centimeter.

Note that although the units can be displayed in centimeters, the hole spacing on the optics table

is still fixed at 2 inches.




Import Assignment. Each laboratory comes with a set of predefined assignments with varying

levels of difficulty that demonstrate the various concepts in the physics of motion, circuits, and

41

optics. However, it is recognized that the types of experiments and their level of difficulty will

most often need to be custom tailored for the level of the class, the level of the students, and the

individual teaching style of the instructor. This button allows a custom assignment to be

imported into the assignment database. Pressing the button brings up a dialog box, which allows

the instructor to locate the new assignment file and then bring it into the assignment database.

Once the file has been successfully imported, it is not necessary to keep the original file. This

import file must be a text- (or ASCII-) based file with the following format:









list (see Figure 9) and on the clipboard. The second line must be blank. The third line is an

optional line. If the word “PRESET:” is present on the third line followed by a preset experiment

file, then, when the assignment is accepted by the student, the preset experiment will be set up

automatically in the laboratory. An assignment does not necessarily have to have a preset

assignment. It is only meant as an option that allows different levels of experiments to be

assigned to the students. If the PRESET: line is missing then the third line in the text file is

assumed to be the beginning of the assignment description. If the PRESET: line is wrong or an

invalid or missing file is found, the third line is also interpreted as the beginning of the

assignment description. Preset experiments for assignments must be located in the

Assignment/Mechanics, Assignment/Circuits, or Assignment/Optics directory located in the

installed Y Science directory and must have the extension “.ini”. Note also that there should be

no space between the “PRESET:” and the file name. Details on defining preset experiments are

found in Appendix A, although several have been included with the software.


assignment list) from the assignment database if the selected assignment is an imported




1. If the desired assignment is not present in the assignment database, write the assignment

using the format described and import the assignment.

42





Shown in Figure 9 is the assignment area for a mechanics assignment. The assignment areas for

a circuits and optics assignment are identical. The parts of the assignment area are the following:

(a) Assignment Number, (b) Select Experiment, (c) Description Box, (d) Function Buttons, and

(e) Points, Start Date, and Due Date. Each of these is described in the following list:







the students.

(b) Select Experiment. The list of available experiments in the assignment database is contained

in the Select Experiment drop-down list. Experiments are listed by title and sorted






indicated as part of the experiment, it will also be listed here, but not shown to the student.





Help button opens the help window for the assignment folder.











43

Density Assignments

Overview The density assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release a set of solid and/or

liquid unknowns to classes using the density laboratory. Density assignments consist of solids

and/or liquids with unknown densities. When an assignment is released to the students, the

assigned solids and/or liquids are placed in graduated cylinders and the student is required to

determine the densities of the assigned materials. These assignments are given to the students

using the clipboard hanging on the wall in the laboratory, and the student’s work on these

assignments is recorded (by the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab book

for each assignment accepted by the student.

The density laboratory allows students the ability to measure the mass and volume of a large set

of liquids and solids which, in turn, will allow them to explore the fundamental concepts

governing density and buoyancy. The laboratory has a set of graduated cylinders that can be

filled with various liquids such as water, corn syrup, mercury, jet fuel, tar, plus many others.

These cylinders can be filled with one or two liquids to study miscibility or the relative density

of the liquids. The laboratory also contains a large selection of solids that can be dropped into

Figure 10. The Density Assignments folder.

44

these cylinders, and the students can then observe whether the solids float or sink in the selected

liquids. The density of the solids can be calculated by measuring the mass of the solids and the

volume of liquid displaced in the cylinders after the solids have been dropped into the liquid. The

density of the liquids can be determined by measuring the mass and volume of the liquid.

In order to provide students with a set of standard experiments to investigate the concepts of

density and buoyancy, a set of 15 preset experiments has been defined and is accessible to the

student through the clipboard hanging on the wall. These preset experiments are defined using a

set of INI variables that describe the various aspects of each experiment. Details on how to

change the preset experiments are found in Appendix A. These preset experiments can also be

turned off as will be described later.

The density laboratory is used for measurements of volume and mass and the combination of

these measurements is used to investigate the density of both solids and liquids. A density

assignment consists of (1) selecting whether the assigned materials will be real or virtual, (2)

specifying the assignment as the same for the class or different for each student, (3) specifying

the unknown solids and liquids, (4) specifying the points and grading option, and (5) specifying

the start date and due date. When a density assignment has been released, the assignment will

appear on the clipboard. A student accepts the assignment by clicking on the Accept button,

which will then display any assignment instructions. The student now proceeds with the density

experiment and reports their results using the lab book.

The density assignment folder is divided into two areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2)

assignments. Details on these two areas of the folder and on defining a density assignment are

given below.

Laboratory Setup Shown in Figure 10 is the laboratory setup area of the density assignment folder. Information on

the currently selected class is given at the top, followed by the laboratory setup options, followed

by three buttons that are used to create assignments and retrieve or archive density assignments.

Class information cannot be modified in this folder. It should be remembered that the settings

specified in this area of the density folder apply to the selected class as a whole and not to a

given assignment.

Preset Experiments. The clipboard in the density laboratory contains a list of 15 preset

experiments that the student can select to automatically set up experiments in the laboratory.




Glassware Errors. Actual graduated cylinders do not deliver volumes that correspond exactly to

the scale etched on the cylinder. These volumetric errors are simulated in the laboratory by

assigning appropriate error functions to each piece of glassware available in the laboratory.

Deselecting this option will turn off these error functions, and the graduated cylinders will

deliver the volumes as indicated.

45




Retrieve Assignment. This button retrieves a density assignment from a set of assignments that

have been previously archived. Details on archiving and retrieving density assignments are given

in the Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.

Archive Assignment. This button saves or archives the currently selected density assignment.

Details on archiving and retrieving density assignments are given in the Archiving and

Retrieving Assignments section.





3. Specify the assignment type as Real or Virtual.

4. Select the fluids and/or solids that will go into the five graduated cylinders.




Shown in Figure 10 is the assignment area for a density assignment. The parts of the assignment

area are the following: (a) Assignment Number, (b) Assignment Title, (c) Fluids, (d) Solids, (e)

Material Type, (f) Assign Unknown, (g) Student List, (h) Assignment Instructions, (i) Reporting,

(j) Function Buttons, (k) Auto-Grade and Points, and (l) Start Date and Due Date. Each of these

is described in the following list:







the students.


identify the type of measurement that has been assigned, and it is also used as the default

46

name when archiving the assignment. (See Archiving and Retrieving Assignments for

details.) Assignment titles are entered by clicking on the text box and typing the appropriate

text.

(c) Fluids. The five fluid buttons represent the five graduated cylinders in the laboratory. These

buttons are used to select the fluids that will be used for the unknowns. Clicking on any of

the buttons brings up a dialog box containing (1) a drop down list where you specify if the

fluid should be selected manually or randomly, (2) the list of available fluids, and (3) the

Save and Cancel buttons. When selecting fluids manually, you must select a fluid for each

graduated cylinder and for each student if assigning a unique unknown for each student (see

below). When selecting unknown fluids randomly, you must select a group or range of fluids

from which the program will randomly assign an unknown to the class or to each student.

These fluid assignments are made at the time the overall assignment is saved.

(d) Solids. The five solid buttons represent the five graduated cylinders in the laboratory. These

buttons are used to select the solids that will be used for the unknowns. Clicking on any of

the buttons brings up a dialog box containing (1) a drop down list where you specify if the

solid should be selected manually or randomly, (2) the list of available solids, and (3) the

Save and Cancel buttons. When selecting solids manually, you must select a solid for each

graduated cylinder and for each student if assigning a unique unknown for each student (see

below). When selecting unknown solids randomly, you must select a group or range of solids

from which the program will randomly assign an unknown to the class or to each student.

These solid assignments are made at the time the overall assignment is saved.

(e) Material Type. The type of measurement that can be assigned for a density assignment

includes Real or Virtual. A Real assignment uses real solids and fluids for the basis of the

unknowns. A Virtual assignment allows the use of virtual materials having a range of

densities and viscosities selected randomly by the program at the time the assignment is

saved. The range of densities for these materials is defined in the Fluids and Solids sections

of the assignment folder. The default assignment type is Real.

(f) Assign Unknown. Assignments can be given to students either By Class or By Student. In a

By Class assignment, each student in the class will receive the same unknown solid or fluid.

In a By Student assignment, the unknowns can be assigned randomly or manually to each

student. By default, assignments are defined By Class.

(g) Student List. A student list (not shown in Figure 10) is provided for By Student assignments

to show the unknowns that have been assigned to each student. The list shows three students.

The middle student in the box is the currently selected student, and there is a student before

and after. Student names in red indicate an assignment has not been given, whereas student

names in blue indicate an assignment has been given. The up and down arrows are used to

scroll through the list. When an assignment has been made (name in blue), the unknowns that

have been assigned to that student are given in the Fluids and Solids sections. Changes in the

assignments can be made up until the start date.

47

(h) Assignment Instructions. As part of an assignment, it is possible to include instructions for




These instructions will be available for viewing on the clipboard when an assignment is

accepted, and they will be available on the TV in the laboratory while the assignment is out

in the laboratory.

(i) Reporting. When reporting the unknown densities for the selected assignment, the answers

can be reported either Numerically or on a Relative basis. Numerically means the answers

will be reported as numbers and graded against actual values. Relative means the densities

will be ranked from lowest to highest but no absolute values will need to be given. Answers

will be graded Numerically by default.

(j) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save

button saves the current assignment. For By Student assignments, pressing the Save button

saves the assignment for the selected student only. The Cancel button resets the current

assignment to a blank assignment if it has not yet been saved; otherwise, it restores the

assignment to its last saved state. The Delete button deletes an assignment even if it has been

released, and the Help button opens the help window for density assignments.

(k) Auto-Grade and Points. Scoring for an assignment is specified in these boxes. The points are

the total number of points possible for the assignment. The Auto-grade check box is used to

turn on auto-grading. If auto-grading is turned off, then it is the instructor’s responsibility to

inspect the student’s results and assign a score (see Grading). If auto-grading is turned on,

then the %Error and Deduct values must be included as part of the assignment. Auto-grading




answer were wrong by 6.5%, then the student would lose 10 points. If two unknowns are

assigned, then both will be used to deduct points. The minimum score possible is zero. Keep

in mind that because of inherent uncertainties in the volume measurements, typical

uncertainties in measured densities will be about 3%.

(l) Start Date and Due Date. The start date and due date are used to specify when an assignment










48

Archiving and Retrieving Assignments Defining a density assignment can be a time-consuming and laborious process, especially if there

are several assignments and there are several classes for which these assignments need to be

defined. To make this process less time consuming, density assignments can be archived, or

saved, and then retrieved using the Archive Assignment and Retrieve Assignment buttons.

To archive an assignment, define a density assignment following the steps and procedures that

were described in the Assignments section. Pressing the Archive Assignment button will save the

entire assignment except the start date and due date. A dialog box will come up asking for a


the default location is the Assignment/Density directory located where the database is stored. Any

number of archives can be stored with any combination of assignments.





and the actual reagents must be assigned to the students by saving the assignment (pressing the


archive.

Organic Assignments

Overview The organic assignment folder allows the instructor to define and release organic synthesis and

organic qualitative analysis assignments to the class in the organic laboratory. These assignments

are given to the students using the clipboard in the organic stockroom, and the student’s work on

these assignments is recorded (by the student) in the lab book. A new section is created in the lab

book for each assignment accepted by the student.

In the organic laboratory, the instructor has the option to specify whether (a) compound names

are listed as IUPAC names or common names, (b) if the TV tutorial is available to the student

during practice sessions, and (c) if the spectra library is available to the students. These settings

are independent of the assignments and can be changed at any time.

The instructor can assign to the students of a class any number of synthesis or qualitative

analysis experiments. For either type of assignment, the instructor specifies the total points

possible, the date the assignment will be available to the students (the start date), and the date

when the assignment is due. A synthesis assignment involves selecting one of 17 different

reactions, which defines a set of available starting materials, and a product that each student in

the class will make, purify, and characterize. An organic qualitative analysis assignment involves

assigning unknowns (compounds with an unknown structure) to each student either randomly or

individually, and the student, in turn, will use the analytical techniques and functional group tests

in the laboratory to determine the structure of the unknown. The organic assignment folder is

divided into two areas: (1) laboratory setup and (2) assignments. Details on these two areas of

the folder are given in their respective sections below.

49

Laboratory Setup Shown in Figure 11 and Figure 12 is the laboratory setup area of the organic assignment folder.

Information on the currently selected class is given at the top, followed by the laboratory setup

options, followed by three buttons that are used to create assignments and retrieve or archive

qualitative analysis assignments. Class information cannot be modified in this folder.

Display Names As. In various parts of the organic laboratory, the names of compounds are

displayed either as pop-ups, on the chalkboard, or on the TV. Selecting IUPAC or Common

specifies in what format these names will appear. This setting can be changed at any time.

Tutorial. When Tutorial is selected, the tutorial mode is enabled on the laboratory TV and the

student has the ability to see the contents of different solutions on the lab bench when an

assignment is not out in the laboratory. During an assignment, the tutorial mode is automatically

disabled. This setting can be changed at any time.

Figure 11. The Organic Assignment folder showing a synthesis assignment.

50

Spectra Library. A library of approximately 700 FTIR and NMR spectra are available to the

student through the spectra library option on the laboratory TV. Selecting Spectra Library

allows the students to have access to this library in the laboratory and to save these spectra in

their lab books. When a spectra is saved in the lab book from the spectra library, the spectra is

clearly labeled as coming from the library. Note that the spectra for the qualitative unknowns are

contained in the library; therefore, it is suggested that the library be disabled while qualitative

analysis assignments are available to the students. This setting can be changed at any time.


instructor and then released to the class. Details on defining a synthesis or qualitative analysis

assignment are given in the Assignments section.

Retrieve Assignment. This button retrieves a qualitative analysis assignment from a set of

assignments that have been previously archived. Details on archiving and retrieving qualitative

analysis assignments are given in the Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.

Figure 12. The Organic Assignment folder showing a qualitative analysis experiment.

51

Archive Assignment. This button saves or archives the currently selected qualitative analysis

assignment. Details on archiving and retrieving qualitative analysis assignments are given in the

Archiving and Retrieving Assignments section.




2. Specify the type of the assignment as Synthesis or Qualitative Analysis.

3. For synthesis assignments, choose the reaction and product to be made by the students.

4. For qualitative analysis experiments, choose the set of unknowns (or retrieve an archive)

and assign them to the students.


Shown in Figure 12 is the assignment area for a qualitative analysis assignment. A synthesis

assignment screen is similar (shown in Figure 11) except for the contents of the two scroll boxes

and the absence of the student list (described subsequently). The parts of the assignment area are

the following: (a) Assignment Number; (b) Assignment Type; (c) Reactions/Class Scroll Box;

(d) Products/Unknown Scroll Box; (e) Points, Start Date, and Due Date; (f) Student List; (g)

Structure Display Box; and (h) Function Buttons. Each of these is described in the following list:







the students.

(b) Assignment Type. The type of assignment is selected by clicking the Synthesis or Qualitative

radio buttons. For a qualitative analysis assignment, additional information defining the

assignment is also listed. Show C–H Analysis specifies whether a C–H analysis of the

unknowns will be available to the student for this assignment. Qualitative analysis unknowns

can be assigned randomly or individually. In a random assignment, a set of unknowns is

defined by the instructor and then randomly assigned to each student in the class. In an

individual assignment, an unknown can be selected for each student in the list.

(c) Reactions Scroll Box. For a synthesis assignment, the first scroll box is labeled as

“Reactions” and lists 17 named reactions. These same reactions are listed on the clipboard in

the organic stockroom. Selecting a reaction on the clipboard defines a set of starting

materials from which the student is free to choose to perform a reaction. Although the

52

starting materials were chosen to demonstrate the chemistry of the named reaction, the

student is not forced to perform that reaction, but instead, can choose any of the 15 reagents

in the laboratory to perform any other viable reaction. Thus, any named reaction (or starting

material set) is capable of producing a number of products in addition to the products of the

named reaction. Selecting a named reaction in the reactions scroll box defines a list of

products (shown in the products scroll box) that can be assigned to the class to make from the

starting material set. A reaction is chosen by clicking the appropriate reaction.

Class Scroll Box. For a qualitative analysis assignment, the first scroll box is labeled as

“Class” and lists 11 classes of unknowns grouped by functional group. Selecting a functional

group in the class scroll box defines a list of unknowns containing that functional group

(shown in the unknown scroll box) that can be assigned to the students. A functional group is

chosen by clicking the appropriate group.

(d) Products Scroll Box. Once a reaction has been selected, a list of the products that can be

made from the starting material set for the reaction is listed in the products scroll box. (See

Appendix B for a complete list.) The products that are listed first are products that

correspond to the selected named reaction. Other products are also listed that demonstrate

different reactions or selectivity, but can be made from the same selected starting materials

using other reagents and reaction conditions. Clicking a product selects that product, but does

not save the assignment. Above the products scroll box is a drop-down menu, which allows

the products to be listed by IUPAC name or Common name.

Products Scroll Box. (for qualitative assignments) Once a class or functional group has been

selected, a list of products containing that functional group is listed in the products scroll

box. (See Appendix C for a complete list of unknowns.) Within a class, products are

generally listed with single functional groups first followed by multiple functional group

unknowns and from less difficult to more difficult. Above the products scroll box is a drop-

down menu, which allows the products to be listed by IUPAC name or Common name.

Unlike a synthesis assignment, where there is only one product that can be assigned, for a

random assignment it is typical to select a set of unknowns, which, in turn, will be assigned

randomly to the students. Sets of unknowns do not have to be restricted to one functional

group, but can extend to other functional groups as well. A single product is selected by

clicking the name. Multiple products are selected by Ctrl-click (both for the Mac and PC) and

ranges of products are selected by Shift-click. For individual assignments, an unknown is

assigned to each student by selecting a class (functional group) and a single unknown. After

the product is selected, the assignment is automatically saved and the student list is advanced

to the next student. This process should proceed until each student has an unknown.








53




(f) Student List. For qualitative analysis assignments, a student list is provided for making

individual assignments and to show the unknowns assigned to each student. The list shows

three students. The middle student in the box is the currently selected student, and there is a

student before and after. Student names in red indicate an assignment has not been given,

whereas student names in blue indicate an assignment has been given. The up and down

arrows are used to scroll through the list. When an assignment has been made (name in blue),

the class and unknown are highlighted in the class and unknown scroll boxes, and the

structure of the unknown is shown in the structure display box. Updating the assignment

information as each student is accessed can take several seconds. Rapidly advancing through

the students bypasses the assignment update for the intermediate students. Changes in the

assignments can be made up until the start date.

(g) Structure Display Box. Mousing over a product or unknown listed in the product/unknown

scroll box shows the structure of the compound in the structure display box. When a product

has been selected, the structure is shown in the display box by default. For qualitative

analysis unknowns, the structure of the unknown assigned to the selected student is shown by

default in the display box.

(h) Function Buttons. The four function buttons are Save, Cancel, Delete, and Help. The Save




Help button opens the help window for organic assignments.

Archiving and Retrieving Assignments When defining a qualitative analysis assignment, the instructor is required to define a set of

possible unknowns by selecting from the available set of compounds given in each class of

unknown. This can be a time-consuming and laborious process, especially if these sets are large

and need to be defined for several classes. To make this process simpler, these sets can be

archived or saved and then retrieved using the Archive Assignment and Retrieve Assignment

buttons. These buttons are only active for qualitative analysis assignments. Archiving is not

possible for synthesis assignments.

To archive an assignment, define a qualitative analysis assignment following the steps and

procedures that were described in the Assignments section. Pressing the Archive Assignment

button will save the unknown set and the number of points allocated for the assignment. A dialog

box will appear asking for a name for the archive and where to save it. The assignment archive

can be stored anywhere, but the default location is the Assignment /Organic directory located

where the database is stored. Any number of archives can be stored with any combination of

unknowns.

54

To retrieve an assignment, a qualitative analysis assignment must first be created. Inside a

qualitative analysis assignment, pressing the Retrieve Assignment button will bring up a dialog

box where the instructor may select from any of the available archives. Selecting an archive will

automatically define the set of unknowns based on the archive and allocate the number of points

for the assignment if that was also saved as part of the archive. At this point, the start date and

due date for the assignment must still be specified, and the actual unknowns must be assigned to

the students by saving the assignment (pressing the Save button).

Scores

Overview The scores folder (see Figure 13) shows the scores that have been earned by each student in the

class for each assignment, allows these scores to be exported in a tab-delimited text file, shows

the assignments that need to be graded, and allows the lab books to be inspected. The scores

folder is divided into three areas: (1) class and student information, (2) function buttons, and (3)

a spreadsheet view of student records. Each of these areas is described in the following sections.

Figure 13. The Scores folder inside the Class Management drawer.

55

Class and Student Information Shown in Figure 13 is the class and student information area of the scores folder. Information on

the currently selected class is given at the top, followed by detailed student information for the

selected student in the spreadsheet. Class and student information cannot be modified in this

folder.

Function Buttons The two function buttons are View Lab Book and Export Scores. Selecting a student in the

spreadsheet enables the View Lab Book button. Clicking View Lab Book brings up the lab book

for the selected student starting in the Practice section. It is possible to record or modify scores

for assignments that have been reported. See Grading for more details. The Export Scores button

exports the current scores to a tab-delimited text file. A dialog box is used to specify the file

name and path.

Student Records The list of members is given in the spreadsheet with the assignments and points possible listed

across the top. Members can be listed by Name or by ID (password). When an assignment has

been reported by a student but has not been graded, a small lab book icon appears in the cell

corresponding to the student and the assignment. The lab book icon indicates that an assignment

is available for grading for that student. Clicking the lab book icon brings up the lab book for the

student in the assignment section that needs to be graded. While in the lab book, it is possible to

record a score for the assignment or simply view the lab book and then return to the scores

folder. See Grading for more details. When a grade has been recorded for the assignment, the lab

book icons are replaced with the actual score.

Grading

Overview Each student is given an electronic lab book to record their notes and submit their results for

grading. These lab books may be reviewed and graded (assigned a score) by (1) clicking the

stack of lab books on the stockroom desk, (2) clicking a lab book icon in the Scores folder, or (3)

clicking the View Lab Book button in the Scores folder. Each method launches the electronic lab

book and allows the instructor to navigate through a student’s notes, results, and conclusions and

record grades for assignments. Each method differs, however, in how the students and

assignments are selected.

The lab book is organized by sections and pages. The section name and current page number for

the section is listed at the top of the page. The first section is labeled Practice and is always the

section that is available to the student anytime an assignment is not out in the laboratory. When

an assignment is accepted for the first time, a new section is created in the lab book (named with

the assignment number) where only the notes associated with that assignment can be recorded.

Each assignment will have its own section, and these sections can only be modified while the

assignment is out in the laboratory. Once an assignment has been submitted for grading, no other

modifications are allowed. After an assignment has been submitted, an extra page is added to the

end of the section where grading information will be posted. This last page also contains the

56

student’s reported answers for unknowns, and grading comments from the instructor can also be

recorded here.

Described in the following sections are the navigation tools for the lab book, recording scores,

and the different methods the lab book can be accessed.

Navigation Moving around inside the lab book from page to page and section to section is accomplished

using the five buttons grouped at the top of the left page of the lab book. (See Figure 14.) The

description of the functionality for each of these buttons follows.

The Previous and Next buttons are used to go to the previous or next page in the current section.

If a page in either the downward or upward direction is not available in the section, the button is

grayed out and not active.

Figure 14. The grading view of the lab book as accessed through the stack of lab books in

the stockroom.

57

The Search Notes button is used to specify a word or phrase that can be

searched for in the current section or in the entire lab book. Shown on the

right is the Search dialog area that is placed on the left page of the lab

book when the Search Notes button has been pressed. The text box is used

to enter the word or words that will be searched for in the current section

or in all sections. The Search button initiates the search for the word or

words typed in the text box. If a match is found, the page with the match

will be shown on the right page of the lab book with the match

highlighted. Pressing the Search button again will search for the next

occurrence. After a match has been found, pressing the OK button will

close the Search dialog and switch the lab book to the new page. Pressing the Cancel button

closes the Search dialog and keeps the lab book on the old page. The Current Section and All

Sections radio buttons specify whether the search is to be made on the current section or over all

sections in the lab book, respectively.

The Go To Page button is used to

jump to any page in any of the sections

in the lab book. Shown on the right is

the Go To dialog box that is displayed

when the Go To Page button is

pressed. The first box lists the

currently available sections in the lab

book by name. Clicking one of these

will then list the available pages for the

highlighted section in the second box.

Clicking one of the pages will switch the lab book to the indicated page and section. Pressing the

Cancel button keeps the lab book on the old page.

The Exit button exits the lab book.

Accessing the Lab Book A student’s lab book can be accessed in three ways.

1. Stack of Lab Books. Clicking the

stack of lab books on the

stockroom desk launches the

electronic lab book with a dialog

box (shown in the accompanying

figure) that allows a specific class

and assignment to be selected. The

first box shows the current list of

classes. Selecting one of these

classes then lists in the second box

the assignments that have been defined for the selected class. Selecting one of the

assignments listed in the second box removes the dialog box and displays the lab book for the

58

first student in the class with the lab book in the selected assignment section. (See Figure 14.)

In the middle of the left page is a student list where the student shown in the box is the

student to whom the current lab book belongs. Recording a score for this assignment

automatically advances the lab book to the next student. Other students in the class can also

be accessed using the up and down arrow keys in the student list. Other assignments can be

viewed or graded using the Go To Page button or the Search Notes button. Pressing Exit

returns to the select class/select assignment dialog box.

2. Lab Book Icon. When an assignment has been reported by a student, but has not been graded,

a small lab book icon is placed in the cell corresponding to the student and the assignment in

the Scores spreadsheet. The lab book icon indicates that an assignment is available for

grading for that student. Clicking the lab book icon brings up the lab book for the student in

the assignment section that needs to be graded. Recording a score for the assignment replaces

the lab book icon with the score in the spreadsheet.

3. View Lab Book. Selecting a student listed in the Scores spreadsheet and clicking the View

Lab Book button brings up the lab book for the student starting in the Practice section. The

assignment sections of the lab book can be accessed using the Go To Page button or the

Search Notes button. Scores can be modified or recorded in the assignment sections.

Recording Scores In assignment sections of the lab book, a score box and Record button are available at the bottom

left page of the lab book. (See Figure 14.) If a score has already been recorded for the

assignment, then the score is shown in the score box; otherwise, the score box is blank. A score

is recorded or modified by (1) clicking the score box, typing the score, and pressing Enter or (2)

clicking the Record button. A score can be recorded for an assignment even if the assignment has

not been submitted; however, this will prevent the student from further work on the assignment

even if the due date has not passed. Also note that when recording scores, comments can be

recorded in the comment box (not shown) for each assignment for later student viewing.

Utilities

Overview Since the class lists, assignments, scores, and lab books are stored in a centralized database, basic

backup and restore functions are available to protect against accidental or intentional corruption

of the database. In addition to these database utilities, there is also a Message utility that allows

an instructor to broadcast important information or reminders to the students of a selected class

on the chalkboard in the organic laboratory or the chalkboard in the general chemistry

laboratory. All of these functions are accessed by clicking the bottom drawer of the filing

cabinet. Inside the utilities drawer are manila folders, each of which performs a specific utility

function. These functions are described in the sections that follow.

Backup The Backup folder contains a list of the 22 most recent backups listed by date and time with the

most recent backups listed first. Clicking the Perform Backup button performs a complete

backup of the current database. When the number of backups reaches 22, the oldest backup is

59

discarded to make room for the newest backup. These backups are stored in the Backup directory

in the Y Science directory and, therefore, do not protect against hardware failures.

Restore The Restore folder contains a list of the 22 most recent backups listed by date and time with the

most recent backups listed first. Clicking one of the backups generates another list containing the

classes that were stored in the selected backup. Clicking the Restore All button replaces the

current database with the selected backup. A warning is given before the restore proceeds to

delete the current database. A specific class within a backup can be restored by first selecting the

class and then clicking the Restore Class button. A warning is given before the restore proceeds

to delete the current class and replace it with the backup.

Reset The reset folder simply contains a Reset button, which, when pressed, deletes the current

database and resets it to a known state containing one class (Admin) and two members. One of

the members has administrative privileges for access to the stockroom. It is important that after

the reset operation, the new administrative password is either noted or changed so future access

to the stockroom can be ensured.

Messages When administering classes and assignments inside of Y Science, it is sometimes necessary or

useful to send out brief messages reminding the students of deadlines, giving them hints, or

warning them of problems. The Messages folder (see Figure 15) allows an instructor to compose

a message, select the classes where the message will be sent, and define at what time the

message will be released to the student and when the message will expire. Messages that have

been sent are displayed on the chalkboards in the general chemistry laboratory and in the organic

laboratory. Multiple messages can be sent and made available to students at the same time. The

process for creating and sending messages is divided into three steps: (a) compose the message,

(b) select the class or classes where the message will be sent, and (c) define when the message

will be sent and when it will expire.

(a) Composing a Message. A new message is created by first clicking the Create New Message

button (unless this is the first message, in which case the message area is already set up for a

new message). The actual text to be sent to the students can be typed directly into the

message box or can be pasted in from another program. The message can be as long as

needed since scrolling will be available for the students at the chalkboards.

(b) Selecting the Classes. Once the message has been typed or entered, the classes for whom the

message is intended must be selected. Located on the left of the Messages folder is a list of

classes for the current database. Classes are selected by clicking the desired class. Multiple

classes are selected by Ctrl-click (both for the Mac and PC) and a range of classes is selected

by Shift-click.

(c) Sending the Message. Once the message has been composed and the destination classes

selected, the time of delivery for the message must be defined next. Below the message text

box are the Send options. A message can be sent Now or On a specified date by selecting the

60

appropriate radio button. If a date is specified, the date must selected using the usual calendar

functionality described in the assignment folders. The duration of the message or how long

the message will be available to the selected classes is defined by specifying the number of

days (from the send date) the message will be available or by specifying the Until. The

message is not actually sent until the Send Message button is pressed.

(d) Miscellaneous. The number of the current message is shown in the message number box at

the top of the folder. Messages that have already been created and saved can be accessed

using the left and right arrows next to the box. It can take several seconds to update the

message information as each message is accessed.

At the bottom of the Messages folder are the normal four buttons for Save, Cancel, Delete,

and Help. The Save button will save the current message for later action. The Cancel button

will cancel the current message or current changes and revert back to the previously saved

state. The Delete button will delete the current message, and Help will access the Utilities

Help screen.

Figure 15. The Messages folder as accessed from the Utilities drawer.

61

Web Tools The Web Connectivity Option allows the instructor to give electronic assignments to the students

of one or more classes and, in turn, receive their answers and results through a servlet engine.

Details on configuring and using the Web Connectivity Option is given in the Overview section

at the beginning of this users guide. The Web Tools folder, shown in Figure 16, allows the

instructor to configure the Web Connectivity Option and perform several web connectivity

functions. Details on configuring the web option and using the web connectivity functions is

given here. Details on installing the servlet engine are given in the Installation and Overview

Guide, and details on administering the servlet engine are given in the Y Science Server

Administration section below.

Servlet URL. The Web Connectivity Option works by having a servlet engine collect data from

both the instructor and student and store it temporarily on the server. Both the instructor and the

student must specify the URL address of the servlet engine before the Web Connectivity Option

can be used. The Servlet URL text field is used to specify the URL address of the servlet engine

being used by Instructor Utilities. The servlet engine is actually a very small Java program that

Figure 16. The Web Tools folder as accessed through the Utilities drawer. The Web Tools

folder is used to test the servlet engine, update and retrieve data from the web,

and set the URL address.

62

runs on a TomCat server; as a result, several instances or contexts of the servlet engine can run

simultaneously on any given server. It is recommended that each context on the server be used to

pass only one managed database between the instructor and the students since the servlet engine

does not check for duplicate classes nor duplicate students. The format of the URL address will

take the form of http://localhost:8080/Context/y where the localhost will be the IP address or

registered server name of the server and Context is the name of the context war file of the servlet

engine running on the server. The default Context is “yscience”.

Test Connection. Clicking the Test Connection button will query the servlet engine at the

specified URL address to test the servlet engine configuration and the indicated URL address. If

the test is not successful, then trouble shoot the following issues: (1) the TomCat server is not

running, (2) the servlet engine is not running or not configured, (3) there is no internet

connection, or (4) the URL address is incorrect.

Test Server. Clicking the Test Server button will query the servlet engine at the specified URL

address to test the servlet engine configuration, the indicated URL address, and tests the writing

and reading of files on the server. A common problem when configuring the servlet engine is the

servlet engine runs correctly but incorrect permissions have been granted to the servlet

preventing the writing and reading of files. This test insures that the correct permissions have

been established.

Clear All. Clicking the Clear All button will clear all the stored data off the context at the

specified URL address. If more than one database is using the same context, then data from the

other database will also be cleared.

Select Classes. The update and retrieve functions for the Web Connectivity Option can be

performed for each class using the Update Web and Retrieve Web buttons located in the Class

Roll folder for each class. However, if there are several sections of the same class, it will be

easier to select all these classes and perform the update and/or retrieve at the same time. Listed in

the Select Classes scroll box is a list of all the classes for the current database. Multiple classes

are selected by Ctrl-click (both for the Mac and PC) and ranges of classes are selected by Shift-

click. All classes in the list can be selected by clicking on the Select All box. The Update,

Retrieve, or Clear buttons below the Select Classes scroll box operate on these selected classes.

Update Web. This button performs an Update function to the servlet engine for the selected

classes. If there is no new data to send, then a warning is given. If the instructor proceeds to

update the server, then a force update is done which replaces all the data on the server. Note that

the Update function must be performed before students can be authenticated over the web and

allowed to turn on their own Web Connectivity Option. The update function must also be

performed any time modifications are made to the class data in order to provide the students in

the class with the most up-to-date information.

Retrieve Web. This button performs a Retrieve function from the servlet engine for the selected

classes and automatically synchronizes the local database. If there is no new data to retrieve then

a warning is given. If the instructor proceeds to retrieve the data then a force retrieve is done

63

which retrieves all the data from the server and synchronizes the local database replacing any

duplicate information.

Force Update/Retrieve Web. The Force Update Web and Force Retrieve Web buttons are

identical to the regular Update and Retrieve functions except the Force functions copy all the

data either from the local database to the server (update) or from the server to the database

(retrieve). A regular Update or Retrieve moves only the data that is new or has been modified.

Clear Web. Clicking on this button clears the data for the selected off the context at the specified

URL address. This is a destructive process and prevents any students who may try to upload data

from doing so. A class can be re-established by simply performing and Update function.

Database Local Database Location. The database that contains the classes, students, assignments, scores,

and lab books is stored either locally inside the main installed Y Science directory or it could be

stored elsewhere such as on a network drive where it can be shared with other client computers

in a direct access installation. Details on the database structure can be found in the Database

section. The Local Database Location text field allows the instructor to specify the location of

the working database that will be used by Instructor Utilities which, in turn, allows an instructor

to manage multiple databases. The path that is entered in the text field must be a complete path

and must end with /Data/ (or :Data:) For the OS X operating system, the path separators must be

colons (“:”). If an entered path does not contain a valid Y Science database then an initial

database will be created automatically. If you enter a valid Y Science database path, then you will

be prompted to enter a username and password to gain entry to the new database. The entered

path can be saved by either using the Return key or by clicking on the Save button.

64

Y Science Server Administration

Introduction

Requirements In the Web Connectivity Option, assignments and student results are passed between the

instructor and student using a small server application that stores both the assignment and student

data temporarily on the server. This server application (hereafter called a servlet or servlet

engine) runs inside a TomCat server (or any other equivalent application server) that can be

installed on a Windows, OS X, or Unix platform. The server computer can be any computer that

has an IP address and does not have to be anything fancy. The following is a general list of

requirements and other general information needed to setup and run the servlet engine. (Note that

in the following description administrator is either the instructor setting up the servlet engine or

a technical support individual.)

1. The server must have the latest version of Java 2SE JRE 5.0 installed (currently that is 5.0

Update 8). For OS X machines, this will be on the OS X installation disk. You must be using

Tiger 10.4 or greater. For Windows and Unix, this can be downloaded from

http://java.sun.com/javase/downloads.

2. The server must also have the TomCat (also called Jakarta) application server (or an

equivalent) installed. A copy of TomCat for Windows and OS X is included on Y Science

installation CD in the Servlet folder.

3. A directory will need to be established on the server where the data can be stored temporarily

by the servlet engine. All users who will be administering TomCat will need to have

read/write privileges to this directory. This should only be a problem in Unix.

4. It is not recommended that different Y Science databases use the same servlet engine since

there is no checking for duplicate class names and students. This is easily solved since

multiple instances of the servlet engine can run simultaneously on the server. Each instance

of the servlet engine is called a context and must be managed independently.

5. The URL address for the servlet engine will have the following format:

http://localhost:8080/Context/y where the localhost will be the IP address or registered server

name of the server and Context is the name of the context war file of the servlet engine

running on the server. The default Context is “yscience”. This URL address will be needed

by the instructor and students.

6. In order for the Web Connectivity Option to work, the servlet engine must be running on a

server that is accessible to the client computers who will be using it. If the server is behind a

firewall, then it is the administrator’s responsibility to ensure that any client computers

outside the firewall can still see the server.

7. When running TomCat on any version of Windows other than Windows 2000 Server or

Windows 2003 Server, there can only be, at most, 10 simultaneous connections to the

65

TomCat server from the clients. This is by Microsoft's design; however, the connection time

with the server should be short for each client and should not cause a significant problem

except with large numbers of users.

In the following discussion, it is assumped that you have successfully installed and know how to

start and stop the servlet engine. Specific instructions for installing and configuring the servlet

engine can be found in the Installation and Overview Guide. Given below is a description of how

to initially configure and access the servlet administration page, followed by a description of the

various servlet options within the servlet administration page.

Access and Initial Configuration After the servlet engine has been installed on the server, you need to configure each context you

may have deployed. The servlet engine will not work until it has been configured. To do this, use

your browser to go to the link http://localhost:8080/yscience/admin (or use your other context

names in place of “yscience”) and use the username chemlab and the password chemlab (case

sensitive) to gain access to the context manager or servlet administration page. This will be the

address you use each time you need to access the servlet administration page.

The first time you access the servlet administration page, you will be asked to specify where the

database will be located, that is, the path where you will save the context data. (You will need a

new folder for each context.) You will also need to enter a new username and password since the

initial chemlab username and password will not work after the sevlet has been configured. When

this information has been entered, click the Update Path button and everything should be ready

for use. Repeat this step for all contexts you have deployed. Please Note: For OS X, the path

used for specifying where the context data will be stored must be entered using Linux syntax.

That is, if the path on your Mac is Macintosh HD:Users:YourName:ServletData then the path

you should enter is /Users/YourName/ServletData. We recommend that spaces not be used in

any of the folder names.

Administrative Pages

After the servlet engine has been initially configured, the administratin page can be re-visited to

customize various servlet settings, perform diagnostics, and perform various other administrative

functions. The servlet administration page is divided into the following sections: (1) General

Settings, (2) Server Diagnostic, (3) Users, (4) Logs, (5) Database Settings, and (6) Change

Password. Detailed descriptions of these sections are given next.

General Settings Session Timeout Time The servlet can only transfer data to and from the server one session at a

time, although the time required for each session is typically very brief. This setting is the

maximum time a session can last for both students and administrators before a session timout is

invoked. The default timout setting is usually sufficient except updating and retrieving for very

large classes.

Select Server DB Version The Y Science server can administor to both older version 2.5 (v2.5)

and v3.0+ products. Although the different versions use different servlet protocols, you can

66

specifiy with this setting the product version and protocols you wish to use. Selecting v2.5+

(default) allows the servlet to use both protocols, while v2.5 and v3.0 force the servlet to restrict

access to the indicated versions.

Server Status This allows you to turn the transfer of data through the servlet engine on and off.

However, this option does not actually turn the servlet application on and off.

Server Diagnostic This section performs a wide set of servlet function diagnostics to insure the servlet is

functioning properly. Mostly these tests confirm that data can be written to and read from the

specified server database location. After the diagnostic is performed, the test results are

displayed with brief explainations for any failures.

Users Here you can add and delete servlet administrator users. Only those who need access to the

administration portion of the server should be added to the list of users. To add a new user,

simply enter in the username and password of the new user, verify the password by entering it

again, and then click the Add User button. The password must be at least five characters long.

Logs A history of all access to and use of the servlet can be stored in log files for later inspection for

diagnostic purposes. The following options allow control of the logging functions performed by

the servlet engine.

Logging Level This specifies the level of detail to be stored in the log files. These levels include

off, severe, warning, info, and config. Off gathers no information, Severe lists only errors,

Warning lists errors and warnings, Info displays a general log of those who access the server

along with errors and warnings., and Config stores all attempted actions.

File Size Limit This is the maximum or limiting log file size before a new log file is created.

Number of Old Log Files to Keep This is the maximum number of old log files to keep before

the oldest file is deleted.

Log File Format This allows you to choose plain text or XML as the file format for the log files.

Database Settings This section allows you to specify a new database path to store the database information on the

server. Note that specifiying a new database path is a distructive process and resets all database

settings back to their default state and requires entering a new username and password. Setting a

new database path in this section is equivalent to an initial configuration when the servlet engine

was first installed. Changing to a new database path does not erase information stored in

previous database locations and that information can be restored by typing in the old database

path.

67

Note that for OS X based servers, the path used for specifying where the context data will be

stored must be entered using Linux syntax. That is, if the path on your Mac is Macintosh

HD:Users:YourName:ServletData then the path you should enter is

/Users/YourName/ServletData. We recommend that spaces not be used in any of the folder

names.

Change Password This section allows you to change the password for the servlet adminstrator who is currently

logged into the system. The new password must be more than 5 characters long and must be

entered twice.

A-1

Appendix A

INI Variables and Management Issues

Many of the functions and simulation parameters used in Y Science are controlled by INI

variables. INI variables are numerical or text settings that are contained in a small set of INI files

found in the various Y Science directories. These INI files are text-based files all with the

extension “.ini” and can be viewed or edited in any simple text-based editor. It should be noted

that in these INI files, variables are grouped together in sections by a header line with the format

[name], where name is the name of the section. When adding INI variables to a file, the section

names, if not already present in the file, must be added along with the new variables.

During the installation of Y Science, these INI variables are set at what is considered to be the

optimal settings for most applications. However, many of these INI variables can be changed to

fit individual needs and applications. Given in this appendix is a description of most of these INI

variables and how they fit within the greater scope of Y Science. Along with a description of

these INI variables, many issues associated with the management and implementation of Y

Science will also be discussed.

ChemLab INI File

The ChemLab.ini file is the main INI file that controls the overall operation of the software.

Most of what is described in this section is a more detailed description of how the Y Science

simulations are configured and how some of these INI variables can be reconfigured. Given

below is a description of the INI variables that can be modified.

Database Issues When Y Science is installed, a Chemlab.ini file is created in the main Y Science directory that has

the format

[Database]

DatabasePath = path\Data\ (PC)

or

DatabasePath = path:Data: (Mac)

where path is the path to the Y Science directory chosen at the time of the installation. This INI

variable points to the Data directory where the login, class management files, and electronic lab

books are stored. For client installations, this variable points to the database on the server. For

local installations, the variable points to the local database.

During a direct client installation, the installer creates this variable based on where the client

installer was launched. If the installer was launched from the server in the Y Science directory,

then the variable should point to the correct database. If the direct client installer was copied to a

removable media (say, a USB drive), which is then used to install the client program, the INI

variable will default to the removable media drive. During the installation, an option is given to

enter the correct path for the server database. This path must include the \Data\ (:Data:) part of

the path to the database.

A-2

As Y Science has been developed and as new features have been added, the format of the

database has been forced to change. When students are using older versions of the software with

new versions of Instructor Utilities, there could be database incompatibilities. An INI variable

has been added which will control how these incompatibilities will be handled.

[General]

Autoupgrade = No or Yes (default) or Force

A No will always prompt the user to upgrade the database, A Yes will automatically upgrade the

database if it is a student user, and Force will always upgrade the database for any version of the

software.

Lab Book Issues To increase the speed and reliability of the electronic lab book in a Direct Database Access

mode, a copy of the lab book is placed on the local drive of the computer when the lab book is

opened in the laboratory or in Instructor Utilities. When this is done, a lock is placed on the file

to prevent two users (the instructor and the student) from modifying the file at the same time. In

the event of a hardware crash while the lab book is open, this lock remains in effect even when

the program is restarted. This lock can be overridden by the instructor by opening the lab book

inside Instructor Utilities using the View Lab Book button in the Score folder.

When a student has their lab book open in the laboratory, the lab book information is stored in

memory. Saves of the lab book are made only at the time the lab book is exited, when an

assignment is submitted, or when a grade is assigned. To protect against loosing data because of

hardware crashes, the lab book is automatically saved every 5 minutes (300 seconds). The timer

interval between automatic saves can be changed by adding the variable

[Labbook]

SaveTimer = nnnn

to the Chemlab.ini file, where nnnn is the time in seconds between saves. If this line is absent in

the INI file, the time interval defaults to 300 seconds. If nnnn is set to zero, then automatic

saving is turned off.

Servlet Engine URL If the Web Connectivity Option is being used, the URL address for the servlet engine is stored

with the INI variable

[Manage]

WebURL=http://localhost:8080/Context/y

where localhost is the IP address or registered name of the server on which the servlet engine

resides and Context is the name of the servlet engine context (usually “yscience”). In Instructor

Utilities, the URL address is specified in the Web Tools folder. When a student version is first

installed, the URL address is initially left blank and when the first student activates the Web

A-3

Connectivity Option, they must type in the full path of the URL. From then on, the URL address

of the most recently successful authenticated student is used as the default address.

Automatic Web Updates If the Web Connectivity Option is used on the student side, an INI variable

[General]

Web_Install=aConnect

can be set that forces an automatic retrieve when the students enter the laboratory and automatic

updates when the student submits assignments and exits the laboratory. Automatic Updates can

be set individually in the Web Options section of the student lab book, but this variable forces

automatic updates. For security reasons, this variable is mandatory for computer lab installations

using the Web Connectivity Option and is automatically set during a web client install (see the

installation instructions for more details).

Window Behavior Macromedia Director has a feature that causes overlapping windows to still be active even for

windows that are underneath, so when the cursor is clicked on the active window that click is

also recorded on the inactive window. We have addressed this problem by providing three cursor

options with INI variables.

[Window Behavior]

All_Windows_Cursor = Off, Clicks (default), or Always

Popup_Windows = Off, Clicks (default), or Always

Both INI variables work the same way but are applied to different types of windows.

All_Windows_Cursor applies only to the main laboratory windows, and Popup_Windows

applies to the popup windows (lab book, meters, detectors, etc.). Off means an inactive window

cannot be activated except by clicking on the window bar at the top. Clicks means the cursor will

not change when over an inactive window but clicking anywhere on the window will activate the

window. Always means all inactive windows will behave as if they were active.

Inorganic INI Files

There are no INI files currently used for the inorganic simulation.

Quantum INI Files

The quantum simulation consists of a set of fundamental experiments that demonstrate the ideas

and concepts leading up to the development of quantum mechanics. Much of the operation of the

laboratory and the parameters defining the experiments is controlled using INI variables located

in the files Lab.ini, Video.ini, Spectro.ini, Phosphor.ini, KE.ini, and Diode.ini. The variables in

Lab.ini generally control aspects of the entire quantum simulation or experimental parameters

that are in more than one experiment. The Lab.ini file is located in the QuantumDB directory in

A-4

the ChemLabQ directory. The Video.ini, Spectro.ini, Phosphor.ini, KE.ini, and Diode.ini files

contain INI variables that are specific to the operation of each of the indicated detectors. These

variables generally control and define the operation of the various quantum experiments and are

located in the Detectors directory in the ChemLabQ directory. There is one additional set of INI

files and these define the preset experiments located on the stockroom clipboard and used in the

quantum assignments. Described in each of the following sections are the INI variables

contained in each of these INI files. The purpose for providing this information is to grant

instructors the ability to change or adjust the quantum simulation to suit their own needs.

Lab.ini INI Variables Description

[Settings] Required header line.

Move_Detector_Forward=1 For monitors with resolutions of 1024 x 768 or less, there may not be enough room for the main lab window and detector window to be open at the same time and comfortably see changes in the detector as changes are made in the lab. Setting this variable to 1 forces the detector window to be on top after any change is made in the lab. Setting this variable to 0 forces normal window operation.

IntenEGunDisp=1 e/s,10 e/s,100 e/s, 1000 e/s,1 nA,1 uA,1 mA,1 A

The electron gun allowed intensity values displayed on the LCD controller.

IntenEGunVal=1 e/s,10 e/s,100 e/s,1000 e/s, 0.05,0.3,0.7,1

The electron gun intensities assigned to the corresponding display values. It is not suggested that the e/s values be changed.

IntenLaserDisp=1 p/s,10 p/s,100 p/s,1000 p/s, 1 nW,1 uW,1 mW,1 W,1 kW,1 MW

The laser allowed intensity values displayed on the LCD controller.

IntenLaserVal=1 p/s,10 p/s,100 p/s,1000 p/s, 0.05,0.2,0.4,0.6,0.8,1

The laser intensities assigned to the corresponding display values. It is not suggested that the p/s values be changed.

IntenBulbDisp=1 nW,1 uW,1 mW,1 W,1 kW, 1 MW

The super light bulb allowed intensity values displayed on the LCD controller.

IntenBulbVal=0.05,0.2,0.4,0.6,0.8,1 The super light bulb intensities assigned to the corresponding display values.

WavelengthDisp=nm,um,mm The allowed units displayed on the laser LCD controller.

WavelengthVal=1e-9,1e-6,1e-3 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the laser LCD.

WavelengthMax=999 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the laser LCD controller.

WavelengthMin=020 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the laser LCD controller.

KEnergyDisp=me,eV,keV The allowed units displayed on the electron gun LCD controller.

KEnergyVal=1e-3,1,1e3 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the electron gun LCD.

KEnergyMax=050 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the electron gun LCD controller.

KEnergyMin=001 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the electron gun LCD controller.

AlphaKEnergy=5.4e6 The kinetic energy of the alpha particles from the alpha source in eV.

BDisp=uT,mT,T The allowed units displayed on the magnetic field LCD controller.

BVal=1e-6,1e-3,1 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the magnetic field LCD.

BMax=100 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the magnetic field LCD controller.

A-5

BMin=0 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the magnetic field LCD controller.

EDisp=V,kV The allowed units displayed on the electric field LCD controller.

EVal=1,1e3 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the electric field LCD.

EMax=005 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the electric field LCD controller.

EMin=00 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the electric field LCD controller.

HeatDisp=0 K The allowed units displayed on the heater LCD controller.

HeatVal=10 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the heater LCD.

HeatMax=400 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the heater LCD controller.

HeatMin=30 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the heater LCD controller.

SlitDisp=nm,um,mm The allowed units displayed on the two-slit LCD controller.

SlitVal=1e-9,1e-6,1e-3 The multipliers assigned to the corresponding units on the two-slit LCD.

SlitMax=100 The maximum setting on the maximum scale on the two-slit LCD controller.

SlitMin=1 The minimum setting on the minimum scale on the two-slit LCD controller.

Laser_Open_Delay=75 The delay time in msec before the laser lid is removed during a mouse over.

T_Heat_Glow = 399 The temperature at which the heating element begins to glow in K.

T_Gas_XPLD = 700 The temperature at which the gas holder explodes.

T_Liquid_XPLD = 400 The temperature at which the liquid holder explodes.

T_Oil_XPLD = 450 The temperature at which the oil mist begins to smoke.

T_Red = 700 The temperature at which the foils turn dull red when heated.

T_Orange = 900 The temperature at which the foils turn orange when heated.

T_white = 1100 The temperature at which the foils turn white when heated.

Color_A=4096 The first of the visible light scaling parameters used in the spectrometer color window to simulate the sensitivity of the human eye.

Color_B=8.317766167 The second scaling parameter. The equation is Iobs = Imax ln(I A) B[ ] .

Setting_Delay=400 The delay time in msec before a change in any LCD controller is processed.

Gas_Glow=300 The AC voltage at which any gas will begin to emit.

PB_Gx=76.20 The distance, in cm, between position 7 and position 9 on the table. This is used to calculate the deflection of particles in any particle bending experiment.

PB_Ey=91.44 The distance, in cm, between position 9 and position 8 or 10 on the table. This is used to calculate whether a particle will hit a detector in position 8 or 10.

PB_n=40 The number of iterations to use when solving the differential equation while a charged particle moves through the electric or magnetic fields.

PB_EB_Length=0.050 The length of the electric and magnetic fields, in m, for the E and B modifiers in position 7 on the table. This is used in the particle bending experiments.

PB_E_Dist=0.050 The spacing between the electric plates for the E modifier in position 7. This is used for calculating the applied electric field using E = V/d.

A-6

Video.ini INI Variables Description

[Video]

OilYMin=29 The y pixel position where the oil drops disappear from the screen.

OilYMax=379 The y pixel position where the oil drops appear on the screen.

OilXMin=75 The left-most pixel position (xmin) where the oil drops can fall.

OilXMax = 330 The right-most pixel position (xmax) where the oil drops can fall.

PixelFactor=1 The number of pixels used when calculating the speed of the oil drops per pixel.

Oil_Y_Pixel_D_nm=2857 Defines the number of nm per pixel in the oil mist.

Oil_SlowMo_Factor = 5 Defines the slow-motion factor when the slow-motion button is pressed.

Oil1=1.00e-06 Defines the diameters of the 10 different oil drops in m.

Oil2=1.13e-06

Oil3=1.25e-06

Oil4=1.38e-06

Oil5=1.42e-06

Oil6=1.51e-06

Oil7=1.64e-06

Oil8=1.69e-06

Oil9=1.79e-06

Oil10=1.92e-06

Oil1_Size=01 There are 10 graphics that depict 10 different size drops where 01 is the

Oil2_Size=01 smallest drop and 10 is the largest. These variables assign the drop graphic for

Oil3_Size=01 the 10 different size drops defined earlier.

Oil4_Size=01

Oil5_Size=02

Oil6_Size=02

Oil7_Size=02

Oil8_Size=02

Oil9_Size=03

Oil10_Size=03

MaxIntensity=1 The intensity of the egun that blows away the oil drops.

EPlate_D=0.010 The spacing of the electric plates in the oil mist chamber in m.

oilDensity=821 Density of the oil in kg m-3 for the oil mist.

airDensity=1.22 Density of the air in kg m-3 for the oil mist.

airVisc = 1.4607e-5 Viscosity of the air in kg m-1 s-1 for the oil mist.

atmoPres=1.00 Air pressure in atmospheres for the oil mist.

SpotPixel=2 The size of the spots for the two-slit single photon experiments.

PixelPerCM=50 The number of pixels per cm in the x direction on the video screen for the two-slit experiment. Essentially defines the size of the screen.

Video_Slit_D=0.01 The distance of the screen from the slits in m.

SlitTopY=126 The top pixel position for the interference pattern.

SlitBottomY=239 The bottom pixel position for the interference pattern.

SpotSqueeze=0.9 Used to adjust a set of random numbers to give a gaussian distribution.

BaseIntensity=0.25 The intensity of each spot as they hit the screen in the single photon experiment. Overlapping spots add intensity.

Spot_Dis_mSec=750 The time, in msec, spots on the video screen persist before disappearing when

A-7

not in Persist Mode.

BoxExtend=100 For some configurations, the outer fringes of an interference pattern can be very long. This variable sets an upper bound on this size for certain situations.

Large_Spot_Size=8 The size of a simple laser spot on the video camera in pixels.

Slit_Rect_W=400 The width of the white rectangle in a bulb/two-slit combination.

Slit_Rect_H=20 The height of the white rectangle in a bulb/two-slit combination.

Slit_Width_Pixel=187 The width, in pixels, the two-slit graphic can move.

Spectro.ini INI Variables Description

[Spectro]

BB_Min = 10 The minimum wavelength, in nm, for the blackbody spectrum.

BB_Max = 5000 The maximum wavelength, in nm, for the blackbody spectrum.

Zoom_Min = 1 The maximum, full-scale zoom, in nm, for the blackbody experiment.

Graph_Resolution=300 The number of points to use to graph the blackbody curve.

Zoom_Min_PE=0.1 The maximum, full-scale zoom, in nm, for the photoemission experiment.

PE_Detail_Switch=5 The full-scale zoom, in nm, where a switch is made between the low-resolution and high-resolution photoemission files.

Adsorb_Detail_Switch=10 The full-scale zoom, in nm, where a switch is made between the low-resolution and high-resolution adsorption files.

Raman_Scale_Factor=1e4 The multiplication factor for the center Raman peak.

Raman_Broad_Factor=.10 The gaussian broadening parameter for the center Raman peak.

Raman_Sat_Scale_Factor=0.01 The multiplication factor for the satellite Raman peak.

Raman_Sat_Broad_Factor=.010 The gaussian broadening parameter for the satellite Raman peak.

Raman_Wave_Min_nm=110 The minimum laser wavelength where a Raman experiment will work.

Raman_Wave_Max_nm=999 The maximum laser wavelength where a Raman experiment will work.

Phosphor.ini INI Variables Description

[Phosphor]

Spot_Diameter=10 The diameter, in pixels, for general spots that appear on the phosphor screen.

Spot_Remain_mSec=300 The time, in msec, spots persist on the phosphor screen when not in Persist Mode.

Spot_R=108 The R-value for a full-intensity spot.

Spot_G=165 The G-value for a full-intensity spot.

Spot_B=78 The B-value for a full-intensity spot.

Base_Intensity=0.2 The intensity of each spot as they hit the screen in the single particle experiments. Overlapping spots add intensity.

SpotPixel=2 The size of the spots for the two-slit single particle experiments.

PixelPerCM=50 The number of pixels per cm in the x direction on the phosphor screen for the two-slit experiment. Essentially defines the size of the screen.

Phosphor_Slit_D=0.01 The distance of the screen from the slits in m.

SlitTopY=108 The top pixel position for the interference pattern.

SlitBottomY=221 The bottom pixel position for the interference pattern.

SpotSqueeze=0.9 Used to adjust a set of random numbers to give a gaussian distribution.

A-8

BaseIntensity=0.25 The intensity of each spot as they hit the screen in the single particle, two-slit experiment. Overlapping spots add intensity.

Spot_Dis_mSec=750 The time, in msec, spots on the phosphor screen persist before disappearing when not in Persist Mode.

BoxExtend=100 For some configurations, the outer fringes of an interference pattern can be very long. This variable sets an upper bound on this size for certain situations.

Ruth_Diam=50 The base diameter, in pixels, for the forward scattering spot in the Rutherford experiment. Spot size changes size based on nuclear cross section.

Eo=5.4 The energy of the alpha particles in MeV.

Ruth_Intensity=1e5 The intensity of the alpha-particle flux in particles per second.

T=0.001 The thickness of the metal foil in cm.

Area_cm2=144 The area of the phosphor screen in cm2.

DistB_cm=138.2 The distance from position 5 to position 1 in cm.

DistI_cm=81.3 The distance from position 5 to position 4 in cm.

DistE_cm=190.9 The distance from position 5 to position 8 in cm.

DistG_cm=172.7 The distance from position 5 to position 9 in cm.

Ruth_Spread=0.1 The fade parameter for the forward-scattering Rutherford spot.

Ruth_Dis=300 The time, in msec, the backscattering spots persist before disappearing when not in Persist Mode.

Ruth_Spot_Size=6 The size of the backscattering spots in pixels.

Ruth_Spot_Fade=12 The fade parameter for the backscattering spots.

Ruth_Spot_Power=3 A second fade parameter for the backscattering spots.

Sigma=100 A second fade parameter for the forward scattering spot.

PB_Base_Intensity=.25 The intensity of a single particle spot as it hits the screen in the particle-bending experiments. Overlapping spots add intensity.

PB_Spot_Dis_mSec=300 The time, in msec, spots on the phosphor screen persist before disappearing when not in Persist Mode.

PB_ScreenW=12 The screen width, in cm, for the particle-bending experiment.

PB_SpotSize=10 The size of a particle-bending spot in pixels.

PB_Fade=15 The fade parameter for a particle-bending spot.

Grid_Red=100 The grid color R-value.

Grid_Green=100 The grid color G-value.

Grid_Blue=100 The grid color B-value.

Grid_Space_CM=1 The spacing between major grid lines.

KE.ini INI Variables Description

PE_Min = 0 The minimum energy, in eV, for graphing on the bolometer.

PE_Max = 60 The maximum energy, in eV, for graphing on the bolometer.

PE_Zoom_Min = 2 The maximum, full-scale zoom, in eV, for the blackbody experiment.

PE_R=0 The graphing line color R-value.

PE_G=200 The graphing line color G-value.

PE_B=0 The graphing line color B-value.

Time_Interval_mSec=1000 The time interval between measurements in the integrated mode.

Time_Scale_Sec=60 The full-scale time in the integrated mode.

A-9

Diode.ini INI Variables Description [Diode]

Time_Interval_mSec=1000 The time interval between measurements.

Time_Scale_Sec=60 The full-scale time.

Line_R=25 The graphing line color R-value.

Line_G=25 The graphing line color G-value.

Line_B=25 The graphing line color B-value.

BB_Min=100 The wavelength to starting integrating the blackbody intensity.

BB_Max=5000 The wavelength to stop integrating the blackbody intensity.

BB_Resolution=3000 The number of points to use to perform the integration.

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the quantum stockroom is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by

title. If allowed by the instructor, students can select one of these experiments and, upon

returning to the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running. A

preset experiment can also be used for assignments so a student can accept an assignment with

the experiment already set up for them. Preset experiments are intended to provide flexibility for

the instructor so the quantum simulation can be adapted to the level of the class or the individual

teaching style of the instructor. Several experiments have already been defined and are installed

with the software. This section describes how these files can be modified.

Each preset experiment is defined using an INI file. For the preset experiments on the clipboard,

these files have the name Experimentn.ini, where n is a number between 1 and 15 and represents

experiments 1 through 15 on the clipboard. These files are located in the Presets directory in the

ChemLabQ directory. For the preset experiments used in assignments, these files must be located

in the Assignments/Quantum directory and can have any name, but must have the extension

“.ini”. Information on how to use preset experiments in assignments is given in the “Quantum

Assignments” section. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the

clipboard must be modified for each client installation.

Given subsequently is a description of a preset experiment INI file and the variables that are used

to define an experiment. Before reviewing the INI file information, here are some important

points to keep in mind: (a) All of the variables described have default values, so variables may be

left blank or not used at all. An experiment can be set up or defined to any degree desired by the

instructor. (b) Some variables are mutually exclusive; that is, the use of one variable may mean

another variable cannot be used. Some error checking exists for such situations, but the error

checking is not comprehensive. (c) The LCD control boxes for various pieces of equipment use

three different INI variables to define their initial settings: one for the numeric value on the LCD

box, one to define the location of the decimal place, and the other to define the units. Not all of

these need to be used to define the initial settings. (d) Positions on the table are defined using

numbers from 1 to 10 as indicated in the following figure:

A-10

Positions 1, 2, and 3 are for sources, position 5 is for samples, position 5 is also for electric or

magnetic field modifiers or heat, position 7 is for electric or magnetic field modifiers, and

positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, and 10 are for detectors.

The following two tables show the INI variables used in preset experiments. The first lists all the

variables that can be used and their allowed values. Default values are given in red. The second

is an example of a preset experiment for the Millikan Oil Drop Experiment to show how the

variables can be used.

Complete Preset Experiment INI Variable List

INI Variables Description

[Title]

Title=Experiment Title Defines the title of the experiment as shown on the clipboard. Not used for preset assignments.

[Source]

Source=none, alpha, bulb, egun, laser Defines the source for the experiment. The allowed values are shown.

Position=1, 2, 3 (Default = stockroom counter) Defines the position for the source.

On_Off=on, off Sets the source initially on or initially off.

Intensity= (Default = lowest intensity) Sets the source intensity. See Lab.ini file for allowed values.

Setting=nnn (Default = lowest value) Sets the three digits on the LCD source control box.

Setting_Units= (Default = smallest units) Sets the units on the LCD source control box. See Lab.ini file for allowed values.

Setting_Decimal_Position=1, 2, 3 Sets the decimal place on the LCD source control box. 1 is after the first digit, 2 the second digit, and 3 is after the right-most digit.

[Sample]

Holder=none, oil mist, liquid, metal, gas, two slit

Defines the sample holder that will be used in the experiment. The allowed values are shown.

Sample= (Default = empty) Defines the liquid, metal, or gas sample to be used. Allowed values are given in the Liquid, Metal, or Gas Tables found in the QuantumDB directory.

Position=5 (Default = stockroom counter) Defines the position for the sample. 5 is the only allowed position.

Spacing=nnn (Default = lowest value) Sets the three digits on the LCD spacing control box for the two-slit sample.

1 4 8

2 5 7 9

3 6 10

A-11

Spacing_Units=nm, um, mm Sets the units on the LCD spacing control box. The allowed values are shown.

Spacing_Decimal_Position=1, 2, 3 Sets the decimal place on the LCD spacing control box. 1 is after the first digit, 2 is after the second digit, and 3 is after the right-most digit.

[Detector]

Detector=none, phosphor, spectro, video, diode, bolometer

Defines the detector that will be used in the experiment. The allowed values are shown.

Position=1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10 (Default =

stockroom counter) Puts the detector in the specified position. The allowed values are shown.

On_Off=on, off Turns the detector initially on or initially off.

[Modifiers]

Modifier=none, heat, E_field, B_field, E_B_field

Defines the modifiers that will be used in the experiment. The allowed values are shown. To use an electric and magnetic field combination, utilize the E_B_field value. Heat cannot be used in combination with another modifier.

Position=5, 7 (Default = stockroom counter) Puts the modifiers in position 5 or 7. Heat can only be in position 5. The electric and magnetic fields must be in the same position.

E_Setting=nnn (Default = lowest value) Sets the three digits on the LCD electric field control box.

E_Setting_Units=V, kV Sets the units on the LCD electric field control box. The allowed values are shown.

E_Setting_Decimal_Position=1, 2, 3 Sets the decimal place on the LCD electric field control box. 1 is after the first digit, 2 is after the second digit, and 3 is after the right-most digit.

B_Setting=nnn (Default = lowest value) Sets the three digits on the LCD magnetic field control box.

B_Setting_Units=uT, mT, T Sets the units on the LCD magnetic field control box. The allowed values are shown.

B_Setting_Decimal_Position=1, 2, 3 Sets the decimal place on the LCD magnetic field control box. 1 is after the first digit, 2 is after the second digit, and 3 is after the right-most digit.

H_Setting=nnn (Default = lowest value) Sets the temperature on the heat modifier. The units of the specified temperature must be in Kelvin and the ones digit must be 0 (zero).

An Example of a Millikan Oil Drop Preset Experiment INI Variables Description [Title]

Title=Millikan Oil Drop Experiment Defines the title of the experiment shown on the clipboard. Not used for preset assignments.

[Source]

Source=eGun Defines the source as the electron gun.

Position=2 Puts the source at position 2.

On_Off=on Turns the source on initially.

Intensity=1 nA Sets the source intensity to 1 nA.

Setting=100 Sets the electron gun energy to 100 on the LCD box.

Setting_Units=me Sets the electron gun energy units to meV.

Setting_Decimal_Position=3 Puts the electron gun energy decimal place to the right-most position.

[Sample]

Holder=oil mist Defines the holder as the oil mist.

Position=5 Puts the oil mist in position 5.

[Detector]

A-12

Detector=video Defines the detector as the video camera.

Position=9 Puts the video camera in position 9.

On_Off=on Turns the video camera on.

[Modifiers]

Modifier=E_field Defines the modifier as the electric field.

Position=5 Puts the modifier in position 5.

E_Setting=0 Sets the electric field initially to zero.

E_Setting_Units=V Sets the units on the electric field LCD box to volts (V).

E_Setting_Decimal_Position=3 Puts the decimal place to the right-most position.

Gases INI Files

The gases laboratory consists of a set of simulated physical chemistry experiments that

demonstrate the behavior of ideal, real, and van der Waals gases under varying experimental

conditions. Much of the operation of the laboratory and the parameters defining the experiments

is controlled using INI variables located in the two files Gases.ini and Units.ini located in the

GasINI directory in the ChemLabG directory. The variables in Gases.ini generally control

aspects of the four different gas experiments, and the variables in Units.ini control the operation

of the LCD controllers, unit conversions, and significant figures. There is one additional set of

INI files and these define the preset experiments located on the stockroom clipboard and used in

the gases assignments. Described in each of the following sections are the INI variables


instructors the ability to change or adjust the gases simulation to suit their own needs.

Gases.ini INI Variables Description [General] Slider_Delay_mSec=500 The time in milliseconds that the slider remains stationary before changing the

digits on the LCD. Slider_Change_Rate_mSec=500 The time in milliseconds between the changing of digits of the LCD when the

slider is dragged up or down. Labbook_Save_Method=Any_Change This specifies when data will be saved to the lab book. “Any_Change” saves

the data after every change. “Slider” saves the data only after the slider is released.

Labbook_Data_Line_Limit = 1000 The limit of lines that the lab book will save before it automatically starts a new page.

Limit_Error_Per=.1 When iterating the solutions for real gases, this variable specifies how close (in percent) the iterations have to be before the algorithm says it is done.

Auto_Min_Max=0 Defines whether the LCD’s go automatically to the max or min when a number higher or lower than that amount is selected. Zero is off.

[Experiment_1] (The following apply only to the Balloon Experiment.) Volume_Init_m^3=0 The initial volume of experiment in units of m3. Volume_Unit=m^3 The initial units of volume. Balloon_Max_Vol_m^3=0.012 The maximum allowed volume of the balloon in m3 before it pops. Pressure_Init_Pa=100000 The initial pressure in units of Pascals. Pressure_H2O_Init_Pa=100000 The initial pressure in units of Pascals if the gas chosen is H2O. Pressure_Max_Pa=1e9 The maximum pressure allowed in the experiment in units of Pascals.

A-13

Pressure_Min_Pa=0 The minimum pressure of the experiment. Pressure_Unit=Pa The initial units of pressure. Temp_Init_K=298 The initial temperature in Kelvin. Temp_H2O_Init_K=400 The initial temperature, in Kelvin, if the gas chosen is H2O. Temp_Max_K=3000 The maximum temperature allowed in the experiment in Kelvin. Temp_Min_K=0 The minimum temperature of the experiment. Temp_Unit=K The initial unit of temperature. n_Init=0 The initial number of moles. n_max=50.0 The maximum number of moles allowed in the experiment. Flow_Rate_1=0.01 The number of moles per second that are released from the gas regulator at Flow_Rate_2=0.02 the different flow rates selected on the regulator. Flow_Rate_3=0.04 Flow_Rate_4=0.06 Flow_Rate_5=0.08 Flow_Rate_6=0.1 Flow_Rate_7=0.15 Flow_Rate_8=0.2 Flow_Rate_9=0.25 Flow_Rate_10=.3 Regulator_Pressure_1_Pa=138000 The pressure setting for the regulator at the various needle positions. Regulator_Pressure_2_Pa=276000 Regulator_Pressure_3_Pa=414000 Regulator_Pressure_4_Pa=552000 Regulator_Pressure_5_Pa=690000 Regulator_Pressure_6_Pa=827000 Regulator_Pressure_7_Pa=965000 Regulator_Pressure_8_Pa=1103000 Regulator_Pressure_9_Pa=1241000 Regulator_Pressure_10_Pa=1517000 P_Atmosphere_Pa=101010 The pressure settings on the regulator are actually relative to atmospheric

pressure. This variable specifies what is atmospheric pressure in the lab. Wide_Update_Time_mSec = 333 Time in milliseconds for the experiment to be updated in the zoomed out mode

when gas is being added. Temp_1_K=50 The temperature, in Kelvin, where the bath liquid changes color to indicate

changes in temperature (sea green to light blue). Temp_2_K=150 The temperature where the cord changes color from light blue to dark blue. Temp_3_K=250 The temperature where the cord changes color from dark blue to forest green. Temp_4_K=350 The temperature where the cord changes color from forest green to yellow. Temp_5_K=450 The temperature where the cord changes color from yellow to goldenrod. Temp_6_K=550 The temperature where the cord changes color from goldenrod to red. Real_Approx_Error_Per=0.0001 The error limit for iterating real gas solutions in per cent. [Experiment_2] (The following apply only to the Pressure Experiment.) Volume_Init_m^3=0.004 The initial volume of experiment in units of m3. Volume_H2O_Init_m^3=0.004 The initial volume of experiment in units of m3 if the gas chosen is H2O. Volume_Unit=m^3 The initial units of volume. Vol_Max_m^3=0.004 The maximum allowed volume of the experiment in units of m3. Vol_Min_m^3=0.0 The minimum allowed volume of the experiment in units of m3.

A-14

Pressure_Init_Pa=0 The initial pressure in units of Pascals. Pressure_H2O_Init_Pa=0 The initial pressure in units of Pascals if the gas chosen is H2O. Pressure_Max_Pa=1e9 The maximum pressure, in units of Pascals, allowed in the experiment. Pressure_Min_Pa=0 The minimum pressure of the experiment. Pressure_Unit=Pa The initial units of pressure. Temp_Init_K=298 The initial temperature in Kelvin. Temp_H2O_Init_K=400 The initial temperature, in Kelvin, if the gas chosen is H2O. Temp_Max_K=3000 The maximum temperature, in Kelvin, allowed in the experiment. Temp_Min_K=0 The minimum temperature of the experiment. Temp_Unit=K The initial unit of temperature. n_Init=0 The initial number of moles. n_max=50.0 The maximum number of moles allowed in the experiment. Flow_Rate_Pa_1=10000.0 The rate the pressure is increased in the experiment (Pa/sec) for the different Flow_Rate_Pa_2=20000.0 regulator settings. Flow_Rate_Pa_3=30000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_4=40000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_5=50000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_6=60000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_7=70000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_8=80000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_9=90000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_10=100000.0 Regulator_Pressure_1_Pa=138000 The pressure setting for the regulator at the various needle positions. Regulator_Pressure_2_Pa=276000 Regulator_Pressure_3_Pa=414000 Regulator_Pressure_4_Pa=552000 Regulator_Pressure_5_Pa=690000 Regulator_Pressure_6_Pa=827000 Regulator_Pressure_7_Pa=965000 Regulator_Pressure_8_Pa=1103000 Regulator_Pressure_9_Pa=1241000 Regulator_Pressure_10_Pa=1517000 P_Atmosphere_Pa=101010 The pressure settings on the regulator are actually relative to atmospheric


when gas is being added. Temp_1_K=50 The temperature, in Kelvin, where the bath liquid changes color to indicate

changes in temperature (sea green to light blue). Temp_2_K=150 The temperature where the cord changes color from light blue to dark blue. Temp_3_K=250 The temperature where the cord changes color from dark blue to forest green. Temp_4_K=350 The temperature where the cord changes color from forest green to yellow. Temp_5_K=450 The temperature where the cord changes color from yellow to goldenrod. Temp_6_K=550 The temperature where the cord changes color from goldenrod to red. Real_Approx_Error_Per=0.0001 The error limit for iterating real gas solutions in per cent. [Experiment_3] (The following apply only to the Temperature Experiment.) Volume_Init_m^3=0.004 The initial volume of experiment in units of m3.

A-15

Volume_H2O_Init_m^3=0.004 The initial volume of experiment in units of m3 if the gas chosen is H2O. Volume_Unit=m^3 The initial units of volume. Vol_Max_m^3=0.004 The maximum allowed volume of the experiment in units of m3. Vol_Min_m^3=0 The minimum allowed volume of the experiment in units of m3. Pressure_Init_Pa=0 The initial pressure in units of Pascals. Pressure_H2O_Init_Pa=0 The initial pressure in units of Pascals if the gas chosen is H2O. Pressure_Max_Pa=1e9 The maximum pressure, in units of Pascals, allowed in the experiment. Pressure_Min_Pa=1 The minimum pressure of the experiment. Pressure_Unit=Pa The initial units of pressure. Temp_Init_K=298 The initial temperature in Kelvin. Temp_H2O_Init_K=400 The initial temperature, in Kelvin, if the gas chosen is H2O. Temp_Max_K=3000 The maximum temperature, in Kelvin, allowed in the experiment. Temp_Min_K=0 The minimum temperature of the experiment. Temp_Unit=K The initial unit of temperature. n_Init=0.0 The initial number of moles. n_max=50.0 The maximum number of moles allowed in the experiment. Flow_Rate_Pa_1=10000.0 The rate the pressure is increased in the experiment (Pa/sec) for the different Flow_Rate_Pa_2=20000.0 regulator settings. Flow_Rate_Pa_3=30000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_4=40000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_5=50000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_6=60000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_7=70000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_8=80000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_9=90000.0 Flow_Rate_Pa_10=100000.0 Regulator_Pressure_1_Pa=138000 The pressure setting for the regulator at the various needle positions. Regulator_Pressure_2_Pa=276000 Regulator_Pressure_3_Pa=414000 Regulator_Pressure_4_Pa=552000 Regulator_Pressure_5_Pa=690000 Regulator_Pressure_6_Pa=827000 Regulator_Pressure_7_Pa=965000 Regulator_Pressure_8_Pa=1103000 Regulator_Pressure_9_Pa=1241000 Regulator_Pressure_10_Pa=1517000 P_Atmosphere_Pa=101010 The pressure settings on the regulator are actually relative to atmospheric


when gas is being added. Real_Approx_Error_Per=0.0001 [Experiment_4] (The following apply only to the Cylinder Experiment.) Volume_Unit=m^3 The initial unit of volume. Vol_Min_m^3=0 The minimum volume allowed in units of m3. Pressure_Init_Pa=100000 The initial pressure in units of Pascals. Pressure_H2O_Init_Pa=100000 The initial pressure in units of Pascals if the gas chosen is H2O.

A-16

Pressure_Max_Pa=1e9 The maximum pressure, in units of Pascals, allowed in the experiment. Pressure_Min_Pa=0 The minimum pressure of the experiment. Pressure_Unit=Pa The initial units of pressure. Internal_Pressure_Max_Pa=1e9 The maximum pressure, in Pascals, allowed inside the cylinder. Internal_Pressure_Min_Pa=0 The minimum pressure inside the cylinder. Internal_Pressure_Unit=Pa The initial units of the pressure inside the cylinder. Temp_Init_K=298 The initial temperature in Kelvin. Temp_H2O_Init_K=400 The initial temperature, in Kelvin, if the gas chosen is H2O. Temp_Max_K=3000 The maximum temperature, in Kelvin, allowed in the experiment. Temp_Min_K=0 The minimum temperature of the experiment. Temp_Unit=K The initial unit of temperature. n_Init=0.0 The initial number of moles. n_max=50.0 The maximum moles allowed in the experiment. Mass_Init_g=0 The initial mass on the piston. Mass_Max_g=5000000000 The maximum mass allowed on the piston in grams. Mass_Min_g=0 The minimum mass allowed on the piston in grams. Mass_Unit=g The initial unit of mass. Mass_1_Max_g=20000 The masses at which the size of the weight on the piston is changed to a Mass_2_Max_g=50000 larger or smaller image (in grams). Mass_3_Max_g=100000 Mass_4_Max_g=500000 Mass_5_Max_g=1000000 Mass_6_Max_g=2000000 Mass_7_Max_g=5000000 Mass_8_Max_g=10000000 Mass_9_Max_g=20000000 Cylinder_Height_m=0.40 The height of the cylinder used in the calculations (in m). Cylinder_Diameter_m=0.150 The diameter of the cylinder used in the calculations (in m). Explode_Speed=10 Speed in which the piston moves during an explosion. Oscillation_Damp=6 A constant in the piston dampening equation. Oscillation_Angle_Multiplier=1 A constant in the piston dampening equation. P_Atmosphere_Pa=101010 The pressure settings on the regulator are actually relative to atmospheric

pressure. This variable specifies what is atmospheric pressure in the lab. Temp_1_K=50 The temperature, in Kelvin, where the bath liquid changes color to indicate

changes in temperature (sea green to light blue). Temp_2_K=150 The temperature where the cord changes color from light blue to dark blue. Temp_3_K=250 The temperature where the cord changes color from dark blue to forest green. Temp_4_K=350 The temperature where the cord changes color from forest green to yellow. Temp_5_K=450 The temperature where the cord changes color from yellow to goldenrod. Temp_6_K=550 The temperature where the cord changes color from goldenrod to red. Real_Approx_Error_Per=0.0001 The error limit for iterating real gas solutions in per cent. Osc_Cutoff_Per=10.0 The maximum number of oscillations in the piston dampening equation.

A-17

Units.ini INI Variables Description

[Pressure] Units=Pa,atm,psi,Torr,bar The different units that can be used for pressure. Labbook_Sig_Fig=7 The number of significant figures that will be saved in the lab book for

pressure. Labbook_Header=P The header used in the lab book for pressure when saving data. Pa_Prefix=1,k,M The prefixes that are possible when pressure is in units of Pascals. Pa_Prefix_factor=1,1e-3,1e-6 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. Pa_Prefix_Switch=1e3,1e6 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. Pa_Sig_Fig_Max=4,4,4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when units

of Pascals are used. Pa_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2,3,4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point for each prefix when

units of Pascals are used. atm_Prefix=1,k,M The prefixes that are possible when pressure is in units of atmospheres. atm_Prefix_factor=1,1e-3,1e-6 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. atm_Prefix_Switch=1e3,1e6 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. atm_Sig_Fig_Max=4,4,4 The maximum significant figures for each prefix shown in the LCD when units

of atmospheres are used. atm_Sig_Fig_Decimal=3,3,4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point for each prefix when

units of atmospheres are used. psi_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when pressure is in units of pounds per square inch. psi_Prefix_factor=1 The multiplier that is used. psi_Prefix_Switch=1 If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

would be changed. psi_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when units of pounds per

square inch is used. psi_Sig_Fig_Decimal=3 The maximum number of places after the decimal point for each prefix when

units of pounds per square inch are used. torr_Prefix=m,1,k The prefixes that are possible when pressure is in units of torr. torr_Prefix_factor=1e3,1,1e-3 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. torr_Prefix_Switch=.99999,1e3 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. torr_Sig_Fig_Max=3,4,4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when units

of torr are used. torr_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2,3,3 The maximum number of places after the decimal point for each prefix when

units of torr inch are used. bar_Prefix=m,1,k,M The prefixes that are possible when pressure is in bars. bar_Prefix_factor=1e3,1,1e-3,1e-6 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. bar_Prefix_Switch=.99999,1e3,1e6 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. bar_Sig_Fig_Max=4,4,4,4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when units

of bars are used. bar_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2,3,3,4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point for each prefix when

units of bars are used. [Volume] Units=m^3,L,cm^3,in^3,ft^3 The different units that can be used for volume. Labbook_Sig_Fig=7 The number of significant figures that will be saved in the lab book for volume. Labbook_Header=V The header used in the lab book for volume when saving data. m^3_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when volume is in units of m3.

A-18

m^3_Prefix_factor=1 The multiplier that is used. m^3_Prefix_Switch=1 If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. m^3_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when units of m3 are used. m^3_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point when units of m3 are

used. L_Prefix=m,1 The prefixes that are possible when volume is in units of Liters. L_Prefix_factor=1e3,1 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. L_Prefix_Switch=1 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. L_Sig_Fig_Max=4,4 The maximum significant figures for each prefix shown in the LCD when units

of Liters are used. L_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4,4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point when units of Liters

are used. cm^3_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when volume is in units of cm3. cm^3_Prefix_factor=1 The multiplier that is used. cm^3_Prefix_Switch=1 If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. cm^3_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when units of cm3 are

used. cm^3_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point when units of cm3 are

used. in^3_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when volume is in units of in3. in^3_Prefix_factor=1 The multiplier that is used. in^3_Prefix_Switch=1 If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. in^3_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when units of in3 are used. in^3_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point when units of in3 are

used. ft^3_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when volume is in units of ft3. ft^3_Prefix_factor=1 The multiplier that is used. ft^3_Prefix_Switch=1 If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. ft^3_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when units of ft3 are used. ft^3_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4 The maximum number of places after the decimal point when units of ft3 are

used. [Temperature] Units=K,C,F,R The different units that can be used for temperature. Labbook_Sig_Fig=7 The number of significant figures that will be saved in the lab book for

temperature. Labbook_Header=T The header used in the lab book for temperature when saving data. K_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when temperature is in units of Kelvin. K_Prefix_Factor=1 The multiplier that is used. K_Prefix_Switch= If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. K_Sig_Fig_Max=5 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when Kelvin is used. K_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. c_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when temperature is in units of Celsius. c_Prefix_Factor=1 The multiplier that is used. c_Prefix_Switch= If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

A-19

are used. c_Sig_Fig_Max=5 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when Celsius is used. c_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. f_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when temperature is in units of Fahrenheit. f_Prefix_Factor=1 The multiplier that is used. f_Prefix_Switch= If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. f_Sig_Fig_Max=5 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when Fahrenheit is used. f_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. r_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when temperature is in units of Rankin. r_Prefix_Factor=1 The multiplier that is used. r_Prefix_Switch= If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are changed. r_Sig_Fig_Max=5 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when Rankin is used. r_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. [mass] (This section applies to the Cylinder Experiment.) Units=g,lbs,Tons The different units that can be used for mass. Labbook_Sig_Fig=5 The number of significant figures that will be saved in the lab book for mass. Labbook_Header=m The header used in the lab book for mass when saving data. g_Prefix=k,M The prefixes that are possible when the mass is in units of grams. g_Prefix_Factor=1e-3,1e-6 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. g_Prefix_Switch=1e6 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. g_Sig_Fig_Max=3 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when grams

are used. g_Sig_Fig_Decimal=1 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. lbs_Prefix=1,k The prefixes that are possible when mass is in units of lbs. lbs_Prefix_Factor=1,1e-3 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. lbs_Prefix_Switch=1e3 The point at which the different prefixes are changed. lbs_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when lbs

are used. lbs_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. Tons_Prefix=1 The prefix that is possible when mass is in units of tons. Tons_Prefix_Factor=1 The multiplier that is used. Tons_Prefix_Switch= If more than one prefix were possible, the point at which the different prefixes

are used. Tons_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD when tons are used. Tons_Sig_Fig_Decimal=2 The number of significant figures after the decimal point. [moles] Units=moles The unit used for moles. Labbook_Sig_Fig=4 The number of significant figures that will be saved in the lab book for moles. Labbook_Header=n The header used in the lab book for moles when saving data. moles_Prefix=1 The prefixes that are possible for moles. moles_Prefix_Factor=1 The multipliers that are used when the different prefixes are used. moles_Prefix_Switch= The point at which the different prefixes are changed. moles_Sig_Fig_Max=4 The maximum significant figures shown in the LCD for each prefix when moles

are used. moles_Sig_Fig_Decimal=4 The number of significant figures after the decimal point.

A-20

[Conversion_Factors] Pa_to_Torr=7.5006e-3 The conversion factors between different units of pressure. The numbers are Pa_to_psi=1.45038e-4 converted by multiplying the number in the first unit by the conversion factor. Pa_to_atm=9.86923e-6 Pa_to_bar=1e-5 m^3_to_L=1e3 The conversion factors between different units of volume. The numbers are m^3_to_cm^3=1e6 converted by multiplying the number in the first unit by the conversion factor. m^3_to_ft^3=35.3147 m^3_to_in^3=61023.74 g_to_lbs=0.00220462 The conversion factors between different units of mass. The numbers are g_to_Tons=0.00000110231 converted by multiplying the number in the first unit by the conversion factor.

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the gases stockroom is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by title.

If allowed by the instructor, students can select one of these experiments and, upon returning to

the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running. A preset

experiment can also be used for assignments so a student can accept an assignment with the

experiment already set up for them. Preset experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the

instructor so the gases simulation can be adapted to the level of the class or the individual

teaching style of the instructor. Several experiments have already been defined and are installed

with the software. This section describes how these files can be modified.




ChemLabG directory. For the preset experiments used in assignments, these files must be located

in the Assignments/Gases directory and can have any name, but must have the extension “.ini”.

Information on how to use preset experiments in assignments is given in the “Gases









checking is not comprehensive.



is an example of a preset experiment for a pressure experiment using water as a gas to show how

the variables can be used.

A-21


INI Variables Description [Title] Title=Cylinder Experiment Ideal

Sets the title of the experiment as shown on the clipboard. Not used for preset electronic assignments.

[Experiment] Experiment_Num=0,1,2,3,4 Defines which experiment will be used. Gas=N2, CO2, CH4, H2O, NH3, He, vdw, Ideal1, Ideal2, Ideal3, Ideal4, Ideal5, Ideal6, Ideal7, Ideal8

Defines which gas will be used. If an ideal gas mixture is used, use a comma to separate the gases.

VDWa= VDWb=

Sets the a and b parameters for a van der Waals gas. These only need to be present if a van der Waals gas is selected.

Temperature_K= (Default = 298) Sets the temperature of the experiment in Kelvin if temperature is not the

dependent variable. Pressure_Pa= (Default =100000 for Balloon

Experiment, 0 for Temperature and Cylinder

Experiment.)

Sets the pressure of the experiment in Pascals if pressure is not the dependent variable. For the Cylinder Experiment, this sets the external pressure.

moles= Sets the number of moles in the experiment. If an ideal gas mixture is used, separate each amount by a comma and the moles will be matched with the corresponding gas.

Volume_m^3= (Default = 0.004 for

Pressure and Temperature Experiments) Sets the volume of the experiment if volume is not the dependent variable.

mass_kg= (Default =0) Sets the mass on the piston for the Cylinder Experiment. prePiston_Temp_K= (Default = 273) Used for pre piston calculations if the piston is turned on in the Cylinder

Experiment. prePiston_Pressure_Pa= (Default =

506.625e3) Sets the internal pressure in the Cylinder Experiment.

Temperature_Unit= K,C,F,R (Default = K) Sets the starting unit for temperature. Pressure_Unit= Pa,atm,psi,Torr,bar (Default = Pa)

Sets the starting unit for pressure.

Volume_Unit= m^3,L,cm^3,in^3,ft^3 (Default = m^3)

Sets the starting unit for volume.

mass_Unit= g,lbs,Tons (Default = g) Sets the starting unit for mass in the Cylinder Experiment. Internal_Pressure_Unit= Pa,atm,psi,Torr, Sets the starting unit for the internal pressure in the Cylinder Experiment. GasAttached=1, yes, 0, no (Default = no) Defines whether the gas is already attached to the experiment. AttachedGas= Used only if a mixture is selected. It defines which gas is attached. RegulatorPosition=0-10 (Default = 6) Defines the position of the regulator needle if the gas is attached. PistonOn=1, yes, 0, no (Default = no) Sets the piston as on or off in the Cylinder Experiment. Ideal_Real=Ideal, Real (Default = Real) Sets the gas tanks to show either the real gases or the ideal gases. Zoom=yes, no (Default = no) Sets the initial view of the experiment as zoomed in (yes) or zoomed out (no).

A-22

An Example Pressure Preset Experiment

INI Variables Description [Title] Title=Pressure Experiment H2O Defines the title of the experiment as shown on the clipboard. Not used for

preset assignments. [Experiment] Experiment_Num=2 Defines the experiment as the Pressure Experiment. Gas=H2O Defines the gas to be used as H2O Temperature_K=400 Sets the initial temperature to 400 Kelvin. Pressure_Pa= Pressure is the dependent variable in this experiment. moles=.1 Sets the number of moles in the experiment to 0.1. Volume_m^3=0.004 Sets the volume of the experiment to 0.004 m3. Temperature_Unit=K Sets the starting temperature unit as Kelvin. Pressure_Unit=atm Sets the starting pressure unit as atm. Volume_Unit=L Sets the starting volume unit as L. GasAttached=Yes Attaches the gas to the experiment. AttachedGas=H2O Sets the attached gas as H2O. RegulatorPosition=6 Sets the gas needle on the regulator to position 6. Ideal_Real=Real Sets the gases in the lab to be the real gases.

Titration INI Files

The titration laboratory allows students to perform precise, quantitative titrations involving acid-

base and electrochemical reactions. Much of the operation of the laboratory and the parameters

defining the experiments is controlled using INI variables located in the files Lab Variables.ini,

Acidn.ini or Basen.ini, Indicators.ini, Oxidantn.ini, Reductantn.ini, and Saltn.ini located in the

Reagents directory in the ChemLabT directory. The variables in LabVariables.ini generally

control aspects of the laboratory as a whole, and the Indicators.ini file defines the indicators that

can be used for acid-base titrations. Each acid, base, oxidant, reductant, or salt file defines a

bottle in the titration stockroom where n designates the bottle position on the shelf. There is one

additional set of INI files and these define the preset experiments located on the stockroom.

Described in each of the following sections are the INI variables contained in each of these INI

files. The purpose for providing this information is to grant instructors the ability to change or

adjust the titration simulation to suit their own needs.

Lab Variables.ini INI Variables Description [General] Base_Lab_pressure=760 Every day a new random pressure is calculated that will be the same for each

member in a class. This the initial base pressure for the lab in Torr. Plus_Minus_pressure=15 The min/max spread in pressure. %Humidity=50 The percent humidity in the lab. Labbook_Data_Line_Limit=1000 The maximum number of lines of titration data saved in one link before a new

A-23

link is automatically started. Labbook_Plot_Point_Limit = 100 The maximum number of points that will be plotted on the graph. [pH Meter] pH_Slope_%dev=200 The amount of deviation in the slope of an uncalibrated pH meter. pH_Intercept_Max=4 The maximum intercept for an uncalibrated pH meter. pH_Flicker_Time=4 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the pH meter display. pH_Flicker_Max=.01 The maximum amount the pH meter can flicker above or below the true value. pH_Min=0 The minimum pH possible. pH_Max=14 The maximum pH possible. [Voltmeter] Volt_Max_Flicker=0 The maximum amount the voltmeter can flicker above or below the true value. Volt_Flicker_Time=4 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the voltmeter display. Volt_Graph_Min=-5 The minimum voltage possible on a voltage graph. Volt_Graph_Max=5 The maximum voltage possible on a voltage graph. Volt_Calc_Min=-5 The minimum voltage possible for the EMF calculation. Volt_Calc_Max=5 The maximum voltage possible for the EMF calculation. [Conductivity Meter] Conductivity_Max_Flicker=.01 The maximum amount the conductivity meter can flicker above or below the

true value. Conductivity_Flicker_Time=3 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the conductivity display. [Graph Tool] Plot_View_Coords=70,8,329,179 The coordinates for the graph in the plot window. ph_color=55,75,255 The RGB values for the color of the pH line on the graph. conductivity_color=255,55,55 The RGB values for the color of the conductivity line on the graph. tick_line_color=55,55,55 The RGB values for the color of the tick marks on the graph. Label_Text_Size=6 The font size for the graph labels. [Balance] Weights_Density=8 The density of the calibration weights. Balance_Flicker_Max=.0001 The maximum amount the balance can flicker above or below the true value. Balance_Flicker_Time=2.5 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the balance display. Weigh_paper_mass=.225 The average mass of the weigh paper. Weigh_paper_mass_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation for each weigh paper from the average mass. Level1=0.01 The masses of solid added for each scoop size on the side of the bottle. Level2=0.05 Level3=0.1 Level4=0.2 Level5=0.5 Solid_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation for each scoop size when solid is added onto

the balance. Weigh_paper_amount_1=.01 The mass of solid represented by the graphic for each pile of solid. Weigh_paper_amount_2=.1 Weigh_paper_amount_3=.5 Weigh_paper_amount_4=1 Weigh_paper_amount_5=2 Weigh_paper_amount_6=4 Weigh_paper_amount_7=6 Weigh_paper_amount_8=8 Weigh_paper_amount_9=11 Weigh_paper_amount_10=15 [Glassware]

A-24

Beaker_mass=100 The average mass of each beaker. Beaker_mass_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation of each beaker from the average mass. Beaker_vol=.250 The average volume of each beaker. Beaker_vol_%dev=.7 The maximum percent deviation of each beaker from the average volume. Beaker_overflow_vol=.300 The volume at which the beaker overflow animation will be played. BuretRandom_%dev=.16 The maximum percent deviation from true volume. Buret_%dev=.1 The applied error to the true buret volumes. PipetRandom_%dev=.32 The maximum percent deviation from true volume for the pipets. Pipet_%dev=.12 The maximum percent deviation from the true volume for the pipets Grad_vol1=.005 The average volume of the graduated cylinders. Grad_vol2=.010 Grad_vol3=.025 Grad_vol4=.050 Grad_%dev=.5 The maximum percent deviation from the actual volume for the graduated

cylinders. WaterBottle_vol=.001 The average volume delivered by the water bottle. WaterBottle_%dev=10 The maximum percent deviation from the average volume delivered by the

water bottle. [Stir plate] Rate_On=1 The time that it takes in seconds, with the stir plate on, for the meters to

display the newly calculated values after something is added from the buret into the beaker.

Rate_Off=5 The time that it takes in seconds, with the stir plate off, for the meters to display the newly calculated values after something is added from the buret into the beaker.

[Buret flow rate] Position2=0.5 drops/sec The rate at which the buret solution is delivered to the beaker when the

stopcock is at position 2. Specified in drops/sec or mL/sec. Position3=2.0 drops/sec The rate at position 3. Position4=0.5 mL/sec The rate at position 4. Position5=1 mL/sec The rate at position 5. Drop_vol_mL= 0.0544 The average volume of each drop. Vol_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation from the average drop size. [Other flow rates] bottle_flow=20 mL/sec The rate at which liquids flow from the bottle in mL/sec. sink_flow=30 mL/sec The rate at which water is delivered from the sink in mL/sec. flow_delay_sec=0.5 The time in seconds after a bottle is positioned over the buret or a beaker

under the sink or a graduated cylinder over a beaker, etc. before the volume starts to be delivered.

[Iterations] Allowed_dev_charge=.0000001 The maximum percent deviation of the initial possible minimum and maximum

pH’s. Allowed%dev_VolT=.001 The maximum percent deviation of the final iteration from the preceding

iteration in acid-base titration calculations. Allowed%dev_VolR=.01 The maximum percent deviation of the final iteration from the preceding

iteration in redox titration calculations. Allowed%dev_IonicS=.000001 The maximum percent deviation of the final iteration from the preceding

iteration of the activity coefficients.

A-25

Acidn.ini or Basen.ini INI Variables Description [General] Name= Long name that pops up when the bottle is moused over. Short_name= Name that appears on the bottle. Phase=solid, aqueous Phase of the substance. Color=(clear, white, yellow, pink, orange, red, green, blue, purple, darkgreen, darkred, darkblue, or darkpurple)

Color of the substance.

Unknown=yes,no Defines whether or not the reagent can be made into an unknown. [Solids] This section applies only to reagents that are solids. MW= The molecular weight of the reagent. Density= The density of the reagent. Max_Conc= The maximum concentration allowed for the reagent when mixed with water. %Weight= The weight percent (impurity) for the reagent on the stockroom shelf. %Weight_Min= The minimum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Weight_Max= The maximum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Wt_Init_Min= The initial minimum weight percent when creating an unknown. %Wt_Init_Max= The initial maximum weight percent when creating an unknown. Impurity= Defines what the impurity is in solids that are not 100% pure. The impurity is

defined by specifying the name of the INI file representing the impurity (usually NaCl).

[Aqueous Solutions] This section applies only to aqueous solutions. Conc= The concentration given in mol/L or ‘random’. If a concentration is given, then

that concentration is fixed at startup. If ‘random’ is given, then a random concentration between the minimum and maximum is used at startup.

Conc_Min= The minimum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Max= The maximum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Init_Min= The initial minimum concentration when creating unknowns. Conc_Init_Max= The initial maximum concentration when creating unknowns. [Initial species] 1=HP,1- The initial species of acid or base after it has dissociated in water and its

charge. M_1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of initial species. Z1=-1 The charge of initial species. Inert_ion=K,1+ The charge of inert ion. M_inert_ion=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of inert ion. Z_inert_ion=1 The charge of inert ion [Reaction species] 2=P,2- The species in solution and its charge after the first species dissociates. 2-4 3= are acidic species (3-4 are for the species of polyprotic acids) and 5-7 are 4= basic species (6-7 are for the species of polybasic bases). 5=H2P 6= 7= [Equilibrium constants] Ka1=3.908E-06 The equilibrium constants for the acid and conjugate base or base and Ka2=0 conjugate acid. More than one set of equilibrium constants is defined for Ka3=0 polyprotic acids or polybasic bases. Kb1=8.995E-12

A-26

Kb2=0 Kb3=0 [Activity coefficients] HR1=700 The hydrated radius of each species. HR2=700 HR3= HR4= HR5=0 HR6= HR7= HR_inert_ion=300 [Conductivity] 1ec=30 The conductance ( o) of the species.

2ec=45 3ec= 4ec= 5ec=0 6ec= 7ec= Inert_ion_ec=73.48 [Partial Molal Volume] V1=83.0 The partial molal volume of each species in cm3/mol. V2=106.3 V3= V4= V5=115 V6= V7= V_inert_ion=9.02 [Molecular Weight] MW1=165.124 The molecular weight of each dissociated species. MW2=164.115 MW3= MW4= MW5=166.132 MW6= MW7= MW_inert_ion=39.098

Indicators.ini INI Variables Description [General] Acid_Start=1.8 The following variables define the pH chart in the lab view and popup view Base_End=1.8 [Popup] Vertical_Pos=-2 Bar_Height=11 Label_Font_Size=12.5 Transistion_Range=5

A-27

[TitrationLab] Vertical_Pos=0 Bar_Height=2 Label_Font_Size=3 Transistion_Range=1 [Color] Yellow=254,254,7 The RGB values to use for each color. Red=214,49,63 Purple=211,164,218 Pink=255,164,188 Blue=132,214,250 Clear=230,231,231 DarkBlue=53,51,143 DarkGreen=60,83,55 DarkPurple=73,42,79 DarkRed=99,51,65 Green=91,182,138 Orange=246,114,23 [Bottle 1] Name=Methyl violet The name of the indicator in the first bottle. Short_name=Met V The name that appears on the bottle label. Transition1_Start=0.1 The pH at which the color begins to change for the first transition. Transition1_End=1.6 The pH at which the color change is complete for the first transition. Acid_color=Yellow The color of the indicator on the acid side of the transition. Mix1_color=blue The color of the indicator in between the beginning and ending pH of the first

transition. Base1_color=purple The color of the indicator after the first transition. Transition2_Start= The pH at which the color begins to change for the second transition. Transition2_End= The pH at which the color change is complete for the second transition. Mix2_color= The color of the indicator in between the beginning and ending pH of the second

transition. Base2_color= The color of the indicator after the second transition. This is duplicated for bottles 2 through 8.

Oxidantn.ini INI Variables Description [General] Name=Permanganate - Acid Long name that pops up when the bottle is moused over. Short_name=KMnO4 Name that appears on the bottle. Solution=Acid Defines the oxidant as being in acidic, neutral, or basic solution. Phase=aqueous Phase of the substance. Color=darkpurple Color of the substance. (See Acid/Base file for list of colors.) Unknown=yes Defines whether or not the reagent can be made into an unknown. [Solids] This section applies only to reagents that are solids. MW= The molecular weight of the reagent. Density= The density of the reagent. Max_Conc= The maximum concentration allowed for the reagent when mixed with water. %Weight= The weight percent (impurity) for the reagent on the stockroom shelf. %Weight_Min= The minimum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Weight_Max= The maximum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Wt_Init_Min= The initial minimum weight percent when creating an unknown. %Wt_Init_Max= The initial maximum weight percent when creating an unknown.

A-28

Impurity= Defines what the impurity is in solids that are not 100% pure. The impurity is defined by specifying the name of the INI file representing the impurity (usually NaCl).

[Aqueous Solutions] This section applies only to reagents that are aqueous. Conc=0.02 The concentration given in mol/L or ‘random’. If a concentration is given, then


Conc_Min=0.005 The minimum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Max=0.08 The maximum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Init_Min=.001 The initial concentration percent when creating an unknown. Conc_Init_Max=.01 The initial concentration percent when creating an unknown. Water_EMF=1.368 The EMF when the oxidant is in water by itself. [Acid_Base] Acid_Base_Conc=2.0 The concentration of the acid or base in the solution. Cat=H,1+ The cationic species and charge. M_Cat=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of cation. Z_Cat=1 The charge of cation. Ani=Cl,1- The anionic species and charge. M_Ani=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of anion. Z_Ani=-1 The charge of anion. [Inert ion] Inert_ion=K,1+ Identification and charge of inert species. M_inert_ion=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of inert species. Z_inert_ion=1 The charge of inert species. HR_inert_ion=300 The hydrated radius of inert species. Inert_ion_ec=73.48 The equivalent conductance ( o

) of inert ion.

V_Inert_ion=9.02 The partial molal volume of the inert ion in cm3/mol. MW_Inert_ion=39.098 The molecular weight of the inert species. [Half reaction] The half reaction for each oxidizing agent is cR2+fX+oH++nRe-�aR1+eW+mOH-.

If a part is not applicable, then it will be left blank. R1 is the oxidizing agent, R2 is the reducing agent produced, and X and W are other species involved in the half reaction.

SEP=1.507 The standard reduction potential in volts. R1=MnO4,1- The species that is reduced and its charge. M_R1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the species that is reduced. Z_R1=-1 The charge of the species that is reduced. R1_color=darkpurple The color of the species that is reduced. R1_phase=aqueous The phase of species that is reduced. a=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for R1 W= The species for W Z_W= The charge for W W_phase= The phase for W e= The stoichiometric coefficient for W m=8 The stoichiometric coefficient for OH nR=5 The stoichiometric coefficient for e-

R2=Mn,2+ The species after it has been reduced and its charge. Z_R2=2 The charge of the reduced species. R2_color=clear The color of the reduced species. R2_phase=aqueous The phase of the reduced species. c=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for R2 X=H2O The species for X. Z_X=0 The charge for X.

A-29

X_phase=liquid The phase for X. f=4 The stoichiometric coefficient for X. o= The stoichiometric coefficient for H+

[Activity coefficients] HR_R1=350 The hydrated radius of R1. HR_W= The hydrated radius of W. HR_R2=600 The hydrated radius of R2. HR_X=0 The hydrated radius of X. HR_Cat=900 The hydrated radius of the cation of the acid or base. HR_Ani=300 The hydrated radius of the anion of the acid or base. [Conductivity] R1_ec=67 The equivalent conductance ( o

) of R1.

W_ec= The equivalent conductance ( o) of W.

R2_ec=110 The equivalent conductance ( o) of R2.

X_ec= The equivalent conductance ( o) of X.

Cat_ec=349.65 The equivalent conductance ( o) of the cation of the acid or base.

Ani_ec=76.31 The equivalent conductance ( o) of the anion of the acid or base.

[Partial Molal Volume] V_R1=42.5 The partial molal volume of R1 in cm3/mol. V_W= The partial molal volume of W in cm3/mol. V_R2=-17.7 The partial molal volume of R2 in cm3/mol. V_X= The partial molal volume of X in cm3/mol. V_Cat=0 The partial molal volume of the cation of the acid or base in cm3/mol. V_Ani=17.83 The partial molal volume of the anion of the acid or base in cm3/mol. [Molecular Weight] MW_R1=118.934 The molecular weight of R1. MW_W= The molecular weight of W. MW_R2=54.938 The molecular weight of R2. MW_X=18.015 The molecular weight of X. MW_cat=1.008 The molecular weight of the cation of the acid or base. MW_ani=35.453 The molecular weight of the anion of the acid or base.

Reductantn.ini [General] Name=Iron(II) Chloride Long name that pops up when the bottle is moused over. Short_name=FeCl2 Name that appears on the bottle. Phase=solid (or liquid or aqueous) Phase of the substance. Color=green Color of the substance in water. (See Acid/Base file for list of colors.) Unknown=yes Defines whether or not the reagent can be made into an unknown. [Solids] This section applies only to reagents that are solids. MW=151.909 The molecular weight of the reagent. Density=3.16 The density of the reagent. Max_Conc=5.1 The maximum concentration allowed for the reagent when mixed with water. %Weight=90 The weight percent (impurity) for the reagent on the stockroom shelf. %Weight_Min=50 The minimum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Weight_Max=100 The maximum weight percent allowed when making unknowns. %Wt_Init_Min=80 The initial minimum weight percent when creating an unknown. %Wt_Init_Min=90 The initial maximum weight percent when creating an unknown. Impurity=NaCl Defines what the impurity is in solids that are not 100% pure. The impurity is

defined by specifying the name of the INI file representing the impurity (usually

A-30

NaCl). [Aqueous Solutions] This section applies only to reagents that are aqueous. Conc= The concentration given in mol/L or ‘random’. If a concentration is given, then


Conc_Min= The minimum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Max= The maximum concentration allowed when making unknowns. Conc_Init_Min= The initial concentration percent when creating an unknown. Conc_Init_Max= The initial concentration percent when creating an unknown. Water_EMF=1.368 The EMF when the reductant is in water by itself. [Neutral species] Species present in neutral solution (not an acidic or basic solution). O1=Fe,2+ The species that is reduced and its charge. M_O1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the species that is reduced. Z_O1=2 The charge of the species that is reduced. O1_color=clear The color of species that is reduced. O1_phase=aqueous The phase of species that is reduced. [Inert ion] Inert_ion=Cl,1- Identification and charge of inert species. M_inert_ion=2 The stoichiometric coefficient of inert species. Z_inert_ion=-1 The charge of inert species. HR_inert_ion=300 The hydrated radius of inert species. Inert_ion_ec=76.31 The equivalent conductance ( o

) of the inert ion.

V_Inert_ion=17.83 The partial molal volume of the inert ion in cm3/mol. MW_Inert_ion=35.453 The molecular weight of inert species. [Half reaction(acid)] The half reaction for each reducing agent is dO2+hZ+nH++nOe-�bO1+gY+pOH-.

If a part is not applicable, then it will be left blank. O1 is the reducing agent, O2 is the oxidizing agent produced, and Z and Y are other species involved in the half reaction. The following section applies to reactions in acidic solution.

SEP=0.732 The standard reduction potential in volts. O1=Fe,2+ The species that is reduced and its charge. M_O1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the species that is reduced. Z_O1=2 The charge of the species that is reduced. O1_color=clear The color of the species that is reduced. O1_phase=aqueous The phase of the species that is reduced. b=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for O1. Y= The species for Y. Z_Y= The charge for Y. Y_phase= The phase for Y. g= The stoichiometric coefficient for Y. p= The stoichiometric coefficient for OH-. nO=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for e-. O2=Fe,3+ The species after it has been reduced and its charge. Z_O2=3 The charge of reduced species. O2_color=clear The color of reduced species. O2_phase=aqueous The phase of reduced species. d=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for O2. Z= The species for Z. Z_Z= The charge for Z. Z_phase= The phase for Z� h= The stoichiometric coefficient for Z. n= The stoichiometric coefficient for H+.

A-31

[Activity coefficients(acid)] HR_O1=600 The hydrated radius of O1. HR_Y= The hydrated radius of Y. HR_O2=900 The hydrated radius of O2. HR_Z= The hydrated radius of Z. [Conductivity(acid)] O1_ec=108 The equivalent conductance ( o

) of O1.

Y_ec= The equivalent conductance ( o) of Y.

O2_ec=204 The equivalent conductance ( o) of O2.

Z_ec= The equivalent conductance ( o) of Z.

[Partial Molal Volume(acid)] V_O1=-24.7 The partial molal volume of O1 in cm3/mol. V_Y= The partial molal volume of Y in cm3/mol. V_O2=-43.7 The partial molal volume of O2 in cm3/mol. V_Z= The partial molal volume of Z in cm3/mol. [Molecular Weight(acid)] MW_O1=55.847 The molecular weight of O1. MW_Y= The molecular weight of Y. MW_O2=55.847 The molecular weight of O2. MW_Z= The molecular weight of Z. [Half reaction(base)] Repeat for basic half reaction. SEP=-0.86 O1=Fe(OH)2 M_O1=1 Z_O1=0 O1_color=green O1_phase=solid b=2 Y= Z_Y= Y_phase= g= p=2 nO=1 O2=Fe2O3 Z_O2=0 O2_color=red O2_phase=solid d=1 Z=H2O Z_Z=0 Z_phase=liquid h=3 n= [Activity coefficients(base)] HR_O1= HR_Y= HR_O2= HR_Z= [Conductivity(base)]

A-32

O1_ec=0 Y_ec= O2_ec=0 Z_ec=0 [Partial Molal Volume(base)] V_O1= V_Y= V_O2= V_Z= [Molecular Weight(base)] MW_O1=89.861 MW_Y= MW_O2=159.691 MW_Z=18.015

Saltn.ini [General] Name=Barium Chloride Long name that pops up when the bottle is moused over. Short_name=BaCl2 Name that appears on the bottle. Phase=solid Phase of the substance. Color=white Color of the substance in water. (See Acid/Base file for list of colors.) [Solids] These are assumed to be pure. MW=208.233 The molecular weight of substance. Density=3.856 The density of substance. Max_Conc=1.8 The maximum concentration when dissolved in water. [Aqueous Solutions] Conc= The concentration of substance. [Species] Cat=Ba,2+ The species from the compound that becomes the cation and its charge. M_Cat=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the cation. Z_Cat=2 The charge of the cation. Ani=Cl,1- The species from the compound that becomes the anion and its charge. M_Ani=2 The stoichiometric coefficient of the anion. Z_Ani=-1 The charge of the anion. [Activity coefficients] HR_Cat=500 The hydrated radius of the cation. HR_Ani=300 The hydrated radius of the anion. [Conductivity] Cat_ec=130 The equivalent conductance ( o) of the cation.

Ani_ec=76.31 The equivalent conductance ( o) of the anion.

[Partial Molal Volume] V_Cat=-12.47 The partial molal volume of the cation in cm3/mol. V_Ani=17.83 The partial molal volume of the anion in cm3/mol. [Molecular Weight] MW_cat=137.327 The molecular weight of the cation. MW_ani=35.453 The molecular weight of the anion.

A-33

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the titration stockroom is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by


returning to the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running.

Preset experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the instructor so the titration simulation

can be adapted to the level of the class or the individual teaching style of the instructor. Several

experiments have already been defined and are installed with the software. This section describes

how these files can be modified.




ChemLabT directory. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the











is an example of a preset experiment for a strong acid vs. polyprotic acid titration to show how

the variables can be used.

Complete Titration Preset Experiment INI Variable List

[Title] Title=Polyprotic Acid Strong Base Unknown

The title of the preset experiment.

[General] ActivityCoefficient=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the activity coefficients are on or off. On is 1. IndicatorUsed=0-8 (Default = 0) Sets which indicator is used based on the number of each indicator in the

indicator.ini file. Zero is none. [pH Volt Meter] Calibrated=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the pH/voltmeter is already calibrated. 1 is calibrated. Window_Open=0,1 (Default = 1 if the

probe is in the beaker)

Sets whether the pH/voltmeter window is open. Zero is closed.

In_Beaker=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the pH/voltmeter probe is in the beaker or in the rack. Zero is in the rack.

[Conductivity Meter] In_Beaker=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the conductivity meter is in the beaker or in the rack. Zero is in the

rack. Window_Open=0,1 (Default = 1 if the

probe is in the beaker) Sets whether the conductivity meter window is open. Zero is closed.

A-34

[Unknowns] Bottle=1,2,3 Defines which bottle is the unknown. 1-3 are possible. The numbers refer to the

bottle numbers below. Unknown1= s1 Sets the random concentration or percent weight seed (sn) for unknown Unknown2= s2 concentrations. The actual concentration assigned to each unknown is Unknown3= s3 determined using the first set of equations for solutions and the second for solids: Unknown4= s4 Unknown5= s5

xi = si n+15si

n / 3+ 2.5si

2+ 30.9si

4

3+ si +n

Unknown6= s6 [M] = xi 1000( ) [M]max [M]min( )+ [M]min

Unknown7= s7 Unknown8= s8

yi = n +sin / 4

+ 342.5si2

+ 0.9si3

3+ si +10n

Unknown9= s9 wt% = yi 1000( ) wt%max wt%min( )+wt%min

Unknown10= 10s Unknown11= s11 where si is the seed for unknown i and n is the unknown number. Unknown12= s12 Unknown13= s13 Unknown14= s14 Unknown15= s15 [Bottle 1] Filename= Defines which reagent will be used for bottle 1. Given by INI file name. Conc= Sets the concentration if the reagent is a solution. If it is an unknown,

concentration is calculated using seed above. If it is blank but not an unknown, it uses the default value, defined in the INI file for the reagent.

%Weight= Sets the percentage weight if the reagent is a solid. If it is an unknown, concentration is calculated using seed above. If it is blank but not an unknown, it uses the default value, defined in the INI file for the reagent.

Position=1,2,3, or 4 for a solid Defines the position of the bottle in the lab. [Bottle 2] Filename= Defines which reagent will be used for bottle 2. Given by INI file name. Conc= Sets the concentration if the reagent is a solution. If it is an unknown,



Position=1,2,3, or 4 for a solid Defines the position of the bottle in the lab. [Bottle 3] Filename= Defines which reagent will be used for bottle 3. Given by INI file name. Conc= Sets the concentration if the reagent is a solution. If it is an unknown,



Position=1,2,3, or 4 for a solid Defines the position of the bottle in the lab.

A-35

[Buret] Bottle=1,2,3 Defines which reagent is in the buret. Numbers correspond to bottles 1, 2, and 3

above. No salts are allowed in buret. Only one bottle is possible. Amount= Sets the volume of above bottle to put in the buret. Use “full” to fill buret. Water_mL= (Default = 0) Sets the volume of water to put in the buret. Window_Open=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the buret window will be open. Zero is closed. Graph_Window_Open=0,1 (Default = 0) Sets whether graph window will be open. Zero is closed. If buret window is

closed, graph window will also be closed. [Stir Plate] Active=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether beaker is on the stir plate. Zero means the beaker is not there. Bottle_1=1,2,3 Sets which reagent is in the beaker. Numbers correspond to bottles 1, 2, and 3

above. Amount_1= Sets how much of first bottle is in the beaker. Given in mL or in grams depending

on whether it is a liquid or a solid. Bottle_2= Sets which reagent is in the beaker. Numbers correspond to bottles 1, 2, and 3

above. Bottle 2 can only be a salt. Amount_2= Sets how much of second bottle is in the beaker. Given in mL or in grams

depending on whether it is a liquid or a solid. Water_mL= Sets how much water is in the beaker. On=0,1 (Default = 1) Sets whether the stir plate is on. Zero means the stir plate is off.

Example Titration Preset Experiment [Title] Title=Strong Acid Polybasic Base Unknown

The title of the preset experiment.

[General] ActivityCoefficient=1 Sets the activity coefficients as on. IndicatorUsed=3 Sets the indicator as Thymol blue. [pH Volt Meter] Calibrated=1 Sets the pH meter as calibrated. Window_Open=1 Sets the pH meter window to be open. In_Beaker=1 Sets the pH probe to be in the beaker [Conductivity Meter] In_Beaker=1 Sets the conductivity probe to be in the beaker. Window_Open=1 Sets the conductivity window as open. [Unknowns] Bottle=2 Defines bottle 2 to be the unknown. Unknown1=75 Sets the percent weight seed for unknown concentrations as 75. Unknown2=75 Unknown3=75 Unknown4=75 Unknown5=75 Unknown6=75 Unknown7=75 Unknown8=75 Unknown9=75 Unknown10=75 Unknown11=75 Unknown12=75 Unknown13=75

A-36

Unknown14=75 Unknown15=75 [Bottle 1] Filename=Acid5.ini Defines bottle 1 as Acid5. Conc=.2463 Sets the concentration of the reagent. Position=1 Puts the bottle at position 1. [Bottle 2] Filename=Base6.ini Defines bottle 2 as Base6. %Weight= This is the unknown – no percentage weight is set. Conc= Position=2 Puts the bottle at position 2. [Bottle 3] There are no inert salts in this experiment. [Buret] Bottle=1 Defines bottle 1 as the reagent in the buret. Amount=Full Fills the buret. Water_mL=0 Puts 0 mL water in the buret. Window_Open=1 Sets the buret window as open. Graph_Window_Open=1 Sets the graph window as open. [Stir Plate] Active=1 Sets the beaker on the stir plate. Bottle_1=2 Sets bottle 2 as the reagent in the beaker on the stir plate. Amount_1=1.300 Sets the amount in the beaker as 1.3 g. Bottle_2= There are no salts in this experiment. Amount_2= Water_mL=25 Sets the amount of water in the beaker as 25 mL. On=1 Sets the stir plate as on.

Calorimetry INI Files

The calorimetry laboratory allows students to perform calorimetric experiments involving heats

of combustion, heats of solution, heats of reaction, the heat capacity of metals, plus many others.

Much of the operation of the laboratory and the parameters defining the experiments is

controlled using INI variables located in the files Lab Variables.ini, Metals.ini, Organicn.ini,

Reactionn.ini, and Saltn.ini located in the Reagents directory in the ChemLabC directory. The

variables in LabVariables.ini generally control aspects of the laboratory as a whole, and the

Organic, Reaction, and Salt INI files define the respective bottles in the calorimetry stockroom

where n designates the bottle position on the shelf. The Metals.ini file defines the metals

contained in the metals cabinet in the stockroom. There is one additional set of INI files and

these define the preset experiments located on the stockroom. Described in each of the following

sections are the INI variables contained in each of these INI files. The purpose for providing this

information is to grant instructors the ability to change or adjust the calorimetry simulation to

suit their own needs.

A-37

Lab Variables.ini INI Variables Description

[General] Base_Lab_pressure=760 Every day a new random pressure is calculated that will be the same for each

member in a class. This the initial base pressure for the lab in Torr. Plus_Minus_pressure=15 The min/max spread in pressure. %Humidity=50 The percent humidity in the lab. Labbook_Data_Line_Limit=1000 The maximum number of lines of titration data saved in one link before a new

link is automatically started. Labbook_Plot_Point_Limit=100 The maximum number of points that will be plotted on the graph. Calculation_Update_Interval_sec=1 The time interval used in updating the calculations. Max_Heater_Concentration=4.0 The maximum solution concentration at which the heater burns out. Clock_Accel_Factor=5 The factor at which time increases when the acceleration button is pressed. [Graph Tool] Plot_View_Coords=76,8,355,178 The coordinates for the graph in the plot window. plot_color=55,75,255 The RGB values for the color of the line on the graph. tick_line_color=55,55,55 The RGB values for the color of the tick marks on the graph. Label_Text_Size=9 The font size for the graph labels. t_Range_min=5 The range of the X-axis in minutes. [Balance] Weights_Density=8 The density of the calibration weights. Balance_Flicker_Max=.0001 The maximum amount the balance can flicker above or below the true value. Balance_Flicker_Time=2.5 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the balance display. Weigh_paper_mass=.225 The average mass of the weigh paper. Weigh_paper_mass_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation for each weigh paper from the average mass. Level1=0.05 The masses of solid added for each scoop size on the side of the bottle. Level2=0.1 Level3=0.2 Level4=0.5 Level5=1.0 Solid_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation for each scoop size when solid is added onto

the balance. Weigh_paper_amount_1=.01 The mass of solid represented by the graphic for each pile of solid. Weigh_paper_amount_2=.1 Weigh_paper_amount_3=.5 Weigh_paper_amount_4=1 Weigh_paper_amount_5=2 Weigh_paper_amount_6=4 Weigh_paper_amount_7=6 Weigh_paper_amount_8=8 Weigh_paper_amount_9=11 Weigh_paper_amount_10=15 Pipet_Level1=0.00010 The volume of liquid represented by the graphic for each pipet fill-level (L). Pipet_Level2=0.00025 Pipet_Level3=0.00050 Pipet_Level4=0.00075 Pipet_Level5=0.001 Liquid_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation for each pipet size when liquid is added onto

the balance. [Thermometer] Flicker_Max=.01 The maximum amount the thermometer can flicker above or below the true

A-38

value. Flicker_Time=2.5 The amount of time between flicker calculations for the thermometer display [Glassware] Beaker_mass=100 The average mass of each beaker. Beaker_mass_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation of each beaker from the average mass. Beaker_vol=.250 The average volume of each beaker. Beaker_vol_%dev=.7 The maximum percent deviation of each beaker from the average volume. Beaker_overflow_vol=.300 The volume at which the beaker overflow animation will be played. Grad_vol4=.010 The average volume of the graduated cylinders. Grad_vol3=.025 Grad_vol2=.050 Grad_vol1=.100 Grad_%dev=.5 The maximum percent deviation from the actual volume for the graduated

cylinders. GlassError=1 Sets whether glassware errors are on or off. [Metals] Metal_Mass_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation in the mass of the metals. [Dewar] Cup_Vol=.5 The maximum volume of the dewar (L). Cup_Vol_%dev=2 The maximum percent deviation of each the volume of each dewar (set once

for each student). K1=0.095 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations. K1_LO=0.327 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations when the lid is removed. Tao2=1 The heating constant used in heating equations. C_Cal=52 The absolute heat capacity of the dewar (J/K). Resistance=2000 The maximum resistance of the heater in the dewar ( ). Min_Heater_Vol=.02 The minimum voltage allowed for the heater (V). Temp_Sig_Fig=2 The number of decimal places displayed on the thermometer display. [Coffee] Cup_Vol=.513 The maximum volume of the coffee cups (L). Cup_Vol_%dev=1 The maximum percent deviation of each the volume of each coffee cup

calorimeter (set once for each student). K1=0.17 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations. K1_LO=0.52 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations when the lid is removed. Tao2=1 The heating constant used in heating equations. C_Cal=8.5 The absolute heat capacity of the coffee cups (J/K). Resistance=2000 The maximum resistance of the heater in the coffee cups ( ). Min_Heater_Vol=.02 The minimum voltage allowed for the heater (V). Temp_Sig_Fig=2 The number of decimal places displayed on the thermometer display. [Bomb] Cup_Vol=.01 The maximum volume of the bomb sample cup (L). Cup_Vol_%dev=1 The maximum percent deviation of each the volume of each sample cup (set

once for each student). Cup_Mass=12 The mass of the sample cup (g). Cup_Mass_%dev=1 The maximum percent deviation of the sample cup mass. K1=0.1 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations. K1_LO=0.1 The cooling constant used in the cooling equations when the lid open. Tao2=0.1 The heating constant used in heating equations. C_Cal=1949.985 The absolute heat capacity of the bomb calorimeter (J/K). O2_Pressure=30 The starting pressure of Oxygen gas (atm). O2_Pressure_%dev=2 The maximum percent deviation in the starting O2 pressure.

A-39

wire_length=4 The length of ignition wire (cm). Wire_length_%dev=5 The maximum percent deviation in the length of ignition wire. wire_J_cm=10.75 The energy given off by the ignition wire (J/cm). Water_Vol=2000 The volume of water in the bath in the calorimeter (mL). HC_CO2=37.11 The heat capacity of CO2 gas (J/molK). HC_O2=29.36 The heat capacity of O2 gas (J/molK). HC_N2=29.12 The heat capacity of N2 gas (J/molK). Temp_Sig_Fig=3 The number of decimal places displayed on the thermometer display. [Beaker] K1=1.0 The cooling constant of a beaker on the counter (used when ice melts and hot

metals cool). Tao2=0.1 The heating constant of a beaker on the counter. C_Cal=45 The heat capacity of a glass beaker. Ice_Melt_Delay=120 The time delay before ice in a beaker on the counter begins to melt (s). [Reaction Constants] Kr_Organic=0.02 The reaction constant of combusting organics. te_Organic=300 The time for a combustion reaction to give off its heat (s). Kr_Salt=0.08 The reaction constant for dissolving salts with stirring on. te_Salt=60 The time for a dissolving salt to give off its heat with stirring on (s). Kr_Salt_NS=0.045 The reaction constant for dissolving salts with stirring off. te_Salt_NS=120 The time for a dissolving salt to give off its heat with stirring off (s). Kr_Reaction=0.22 The reaction constant for reactions with stirring on. te_Reaction=30 The time for reactions to give off their heat with stirring on (s). Kr_Reaction_NS=0.095 The reaction constant for reactions with stirring off. te_Reaction_NS=60 The time for reactions to give off their heat with stirring off (s). Kr_Metal=0.25 The reaction constant for adding metals with stirring on. te_Metal=20 The time for metals to give off their heat with stirring on (s). Kr_Metal_NS=0.08 The reaction constant for adding metals with stirring off. te_Metal_NS=40 The time for metals to give off their heat with stirring off (s). Kr_Combo=4 The reaction constant for combining liquids with stirring on. te_Combo=10 The time for combining liquids to give off their heat with stirring on (s). Kr_Combo_NS=0.3 The reaction constant for combining liquids with stirring off. te_Combo_NS=20 The time for combining liquids to give off their heat with stirring off (s). [Ice] Mass=25.0 The mass of ice in one scoop (g). Mass_%dev=10 The maximum deviation of mass of ice in one scoop. K_Ice_Stir_On=25 The cooling constant for ice melting with stirring on. K_Ice_Stir_Off=10 The cooling constant for ice melting with stirring off. c_ice=37.466 The heat capacity of ice (J/molK). [Oven] Base_Temp_C=100 The initial temperature of the oven (°C).

Min_Temp_C=25 The minimum temperature of the oven (°C).

Max_Temp_C=200 The maximum temperature of the oven (°C).

[Control Box] Current_Max_mA=500 The maximum current in the heater (mA). [Other flow rates] bottle_flow=30 mL/sec The rate at which liquids flow from the bottle in mL/sec. sink_flow=30 mL/sec The rate at which water is delivered from the sink in mL/sec. flow_delay_sec=0.5 The time in seconds after a bottle is positioned over the buret or a beaker

under the sink or a graduated cylinder over a beaker, etc. before the volume

A-40

starts to be delivered. [Conversion_Factors] atm_to_Pa=101325.0 The conversion factors between different units of pressure. atm_to_bar=1.01325 L_to_cm^3=1e3 The conversion factors between different units of volume. L_to_Gal=.264172052358 cm_to_in=.393700787402 The conversion factors between different units of length.

Metals.ini INI Variables Description [General] [1 A1] Position of the metal in the Drawers [Drawer ColumnRow] Name=Silver The long name that pops up when metal is moused over. Short_name=Ag Name that appears on the label in the drawer. Color=silver Color of the metal (silver, gold, copper, dull) Unknown=yes If the metal can be assigned as an unknown. Mass=27.96 The average mass of the metal. Melting_Point_C=961.78 The melting point of the metal. Heat_Capacity=0.235 The heat capacity of the metal (J/gK). MW=107.868 The molecular weight of the metal. Density=9.32 The density of the metal. BlowUp=No If the metal is explosively reactive with water (Yes or No). [1 A2] Name=Aluminum Short_name=Al Color=silver Unknown=yes Mass=7.125 Melting_Point_C=660.32 Heat_Capacity=0.897 MW=26.982 Density=2.375 BlowUp=No [1 A3] Name=Gold Short_name=Au Color=gold Unknown=yes Mass=51.93 Melting_Point_C=1064 Heat_Capacity=0.129 MW=196.97 Density=17.31 BlowUp=no [1 A4] Name=Beryllium

A-41

Short_name=Be Color=dull Unknown=yes Mass=5.07 Melting_Point_C=1287 Heat_Capacity=1.825 MW=9.012 Density=1.69 BlowUp=no

Organicn.ini INI Variables Description [General] Name=Benzoic acid The long name that pops up when bottle is moused over. Short_name=C7H6O2 The name that appears on the bottle. Phase=solid The phase of the Organic compound (solid or liquid). Color=white The color of the compound. Unknown=yes If the compound may be assigned as an unknown (yes or no). [Physical Data] dHo=3226.9E3 The standard state heat of combustion of the compound (J/mol). MW=122.13 The molecular weight of the compound. Density=1.2659 The density of the compound. Packing_Density_Solid=2.5318 The density used to calculate how much volume the scooped solid takes up. a=7 The number of carbons in the molecule. b=6 The number of hydrogens. c=2 The number of oxygens. d=0 The number of nitrogens.

Reactionn.ini INI Variables Description [General1] 1 contains the information for bottle 1 of the pair (the left one). Name=Hydrochloric Acid The long name that pops up when bottle is moused over. Short_name=HCl The name that appears on the bottle. Phase=aqueous The phase of the compound (solid or aqueous). Color=clear The color of the compound. Unknown=yes If the compound may be assigned as an unknown (yes or no). [General2] 2 contains the information for bottle 2 of the pair (the right one). Name=Sodium Hydroxide Short_name=NaOH Phase=aqueous Color=clear Unknown=yes [Solids1] If the phase for the bottle is solid: MW= The molecular weight of the solid. Density= The density of the solid. dHs= The heat of solution of the solid. Max_Conc= The maximum concentration the solid may dissolve in solution. %Weight= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab.

A-42

%Weight_Min= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. %Weight_Max= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. %Wt_Init_Min= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. %Wt_Init_Max= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. Impurity= This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. [Aqueous Solutions1] If the phase of the bottle is aqueous: Conc=1.0000 The concentration of the solution. Conc_Min=0.010 This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. Conc_Max=4.0000 This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. Conc_Init_Min=0.1000 This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. Conc_Init_Max=0.1200 This is not used for the Calorimetry lab. [Solids2] MW= Density= dHs= Max_Conc= %Weight= %Weight_Min= %Weight_Max= %Wt_Init_Min= %Wt_Init_Max= Impurity= [Aqueous Solutions2] Conc=1.0000 Conc_Min=0.010 Conc_Max=4.0000 Conc_Init_Min=0.1000 Conc_Init_Max=0.1200 [Reaction] dHr=5.58e4 The standard state heat of reaction per mole of the limiting reactant. [Reactants] R1=HCl The reactant in bottle 1 M_R1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of this reactant in the reaction. Ph_R1=aqueous The phase of R1 in solution R1_cat=H,1+ The cation if R1 dissociates. M_R1_cat=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for the cation. Z_R1_cat=1 The charge of this cation. MW_R1_Cat=1.008 The molecular weight of this cation. R1_ani=Cl,1- The anion if R1 dissociates. M_R1_ani=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for the anion. Z_R1_ani=-1 The charge of this anion. MW_R1_Ani=35.453 The molecular weight of this anion. R2=NaOH The reactant in bottle 2 M_R2=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of this reactant in the reaction. Ph_R2=aqueous The phase of R2 in solution R2_cat=Na,1+ The cation if R2 dissociates. M_R2_cat=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for the cation. Z_R2_cat=1 The charge of this cation. MW_R2_cat=22.990 The molecular weight of this cation. R2_ani=OH,1- The anion if R2 dissociates.

A-43

M_R2_ani=1 The stoichiometric coefficient for the anion. Z_R2_ani=-1 The charge of this anion. MW_R2_ani=17.007 The molecular weight of this anion. R3= Another possible reactant in bottle 1. M_R3= Ph_R3= R3_cat= M_R3_cat= Z_R3_cat= MW_R3_cat= R3_ani= M_R3_ani= Z_R3_ani= MW_R3_ani= R4= Another possible reactant in bottle 2. M_R4= Ph_R4= R4_cat= M_R4_cat= Z_R4_cat= MW_R4_cat= R4_ani= M_R4_ani= Z_R4_ani= MW_R4_ani= [Products] P1=H2O The first product of the reaction. M_P1=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of this product in the reaction. Ph_P1=liquid The phase of P1 in solution P1_cat= The cation if P1 dissociates. M_P1_cat= The stoichiometric coefficient for the cation. Z_P1_cat= The charge of this cation. MW_P1_cat= The molecular weight of this cation. P1_ani= The anion if P1 dissociates. M_P1_ani= The stoichiometric coefficient for the anion. Z_P1_ani= The charge of this anion. MW_P1_ani= The molecular weight of this anion. P2=NaCl The second product of the reaction. M_P2=1 Ph_P2=aqueous P2_cat=Na,1+ M_P2_cat=1 Z_P2_cat=1 MW_P2_cat=22.990 P2_ani=Cl,1- M_P2_ani=1 Z_P2_ani=-1 MW_P2_ani=35.453 P3= A third product of the reaction. M_P3= Ph_P3=

A-44

P3_cat= M_P3_cat= Z_P3_cat= MW_P3_cat= P3_ani= M_P3_ani= Z_P3_ani= MW_P3_ani= P4= M_P4= Ph_P4= P4_cat= M_P4_cat= Z_P4_cat= MW_P4_cat= P4_ani= M_P4_ani= Z_P4_ani= MW_P4_ani= [Partial Molal Volume] R1density= The density of R1 if it does not dissolve in solution. R1_catV=0 The partial molal volume of the cation of R1 if it dissolves in solution. R1_aniV=17.83 The partial molal volume of the anion of R1 if it dissolves in solution. R2density= R2_catV=-1.21 R2_aniV=-4.04 R3density= R3_catV= R3_aniV= R4density= R4_catV= R4_aniV= P1density= P1_catV= P1_aniV= P2density= P2_catV=-1.21 P2_aniV=17.83 P3density= P3_catV= P3_aniV= P4density= P4_catV= P4_aniV= [Heat Capacity] R1_HC= The heat capacity of R1 if it does not dissolve in solution. R1_catHC=0 The partial molar heat capacity of the cation of R1 if it dissolves in solution. R1_aniHC=-124.7 The partial molar heat capacity of the anion of R1 if it dissolves in solution. R2_HC= R2_catHC=38.60 R2_aniHC=-141.5 R3_HC= R3_catHC=

A-45

R3_aniHC= R4_HC= R4_catHC= R4_aniHC= P1_HC= P1_catHC= P1_aniHC= P2_HC= P2_catHC=38.60 P2_aniHC=-124.7 P3_HC= P3_catHC= P3_aniHC= P4_HC= P4_catHC= P4_aniHC= [Molecular Weight] R1_MW=36.461 The molecular weight of R1. R2_MW=39.997 R3_MW= R4_MW= P1_MW=18.015 P2_MW=58.443 P3_MW= P4_MW=

Saltn.ini INI Variables Description [General] Name=Sodium Flouride The long name that pops up when bottle is moused over. Short_name=NaF The name that appears on the bottle. Phase=solid The phase of the salt (always solid for salts). Color=white The color of the salt. Unknown=yes If the compound may be assigned as an unknown (yes or no). [Physical Data] dH=-0.91e3 The standard state heat of solution of the salt (J/molK) MW=41.988 The molecular weight of the salt. Density=2.78 The density of the salt. Max_Conc=6.1 The maximum concentration that the salt may dissolve to. [Species] Cat=Na,1+ The cation of the dissolved salt. M_Cat=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the cation. Z_Cat=1 The charge of the cation. Ani=F,-1 The anion of the dissolved salt. M_Ani=1 The stoichiometric coefficient of the anion. Z_Ani=-1 The charge of the anion. [Molar Heat Capacity] HC=46.9 The heat capacity of the solid salt. HC_Cat=46.4 The partial molar heat capacity of the cation.

A-46

HC_Ani=-106.7 The partial molar heat capacity of the anion. [Partial Molal Volume] V_Cat=-1.21 The partial molal volume of the cation. V_Ani=-1.6 The partial molal volume of the anion. [Molecular Weight] MW_cat=22.990 The molecular weight of the cation. MW_ani=18.998 The molecular weight of the anion.

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the calorimetry stockroom is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by


returning to the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running.

Preset experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the instructor so the calorimetry

simulation can be adapted to the level of the class or the individual teaching style of the

instructor. Several experiments have already been defined and are installed with the software.

This section describes how these files can be modified.




ChemLabC directory. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the











is an example of a preset experiment for a heat of reaction experiment to show how the variables

can be used. Provided below the tables is a small graphic showing the position labels used for the

various INI position variables.

Complete Calorimetry Preset Experiment INI Variable List

INI Variables Description [Title]

Title=Freezing Point Depression The title of the preset experiment.

[General]

Timer=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the timer (the timer window) to be open or closed.

[Calorimeter] These are variables for the calorimeters in general.

A-47

Lid=On,Off (Default = Off) Specifies if the lid to the calorimeter is on or off. Calorimeter=Bomb,Coffee,Dewar,None (Default = None)

Specifies which calorimeter is selected.

Position=Counter,Table (Default = Table) Specifies the position of the calorimeter in the laboratory. Position labels are case sensitive.

Temperature_K=298.15 (Default = 298.15) Sets the initial temperature of any water that may be in the calorimeter. Position must be set to Table.

Graph_Window=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the graph window to open or closed.

###Coffee/Dewar Variables### These variables are only for the coffee cup or dewar. Thermometer=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the thermometer to be on or off. Bottle=Bottle,Bottle 2 (Or Blank) Specifies which solution or solid from the available bottles that will be in the

calorimeter. Bottle_Amount=Random,Volume,Mass Specifies the volume or mass from the bottle. Volume should be a number in

mL for liquids; Mass is a number in grams for solids. Bottle_Min= Specifies minimum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. Bottle_Max= Specifies maximum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. Metal=Yes,No (Default = No) Specifies if a metal is already in the calorimeter. If yes, then position in Metals

section below specifies position of dish. Ice=Random,Mass (Default = 0.0) Specifies the mass of ice that will be in the calorimeter. Ice_Min= Specifies the minimum mass of ice for Random amounts. Ice_Max= Specifies the maximum mass of ice for Random amounts. Water=Random,Volume (Default = 0.0) Specifies the volume of water that will be in the calorimeter. Water_Min= Specifies the minimum volume of water for Random amounts. Water_Max= Specifies the maximum volume of water for Random amounts. Current= (Default = 0) Sets the initial current setting for the electrical heater. Stirring=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets stirring on or off. Heater=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the electrical heater on or off. If the lid is off, then the heater is set off.

###Bomb Variables### These variables are only for the bomb calorimeter. Thermometer=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the thermometer to be on or off. This is the bomb control panel. Bomb=In,Out (Default = Out) Specifies if the bomb is in or out of the calorimeter. Screw_Cap=On,Off (Default = Off) Sets the screw cap to be on or off of the bomb. bomb_Head=On,Off (Default = Off) Puts the bomb head in or out of the bomb. Cup=In,Out (Default = In) Puts the bomb cup in or out of the bomb head. Cup_Position=TableE,TableF (Default =TableE)

If the bomb cup is out, places the cup on the indicated table position.

Bottle=Bottle (Or Blank) Specifies that the liquid or solid from the selected bottle is in the bomb cup. Bottle_Amount=Random,Volume,Mass Specifies the volume or mass from the bottle. Volume should be a number in

mL for liquids; Mass is a number in grams for solids. Bottle_Min= Specifies minimum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. Bottle_Max= Specifies maximum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts.

[Bottle] These variables define what chemical is represented by Bottle or Bottle 2. Filename=Salt1.ini The name of the organic, salt, or reaction INI file. Position=CounterA,CounterB,CounterC,TableA,TableB,TableC,TableG (Default =TableG for organics & solids,

TableA for aqueous reactants)

Position for the bottle in the laboratory.

Bottle2_Position=CounterA,CounterB,CounterC,TableA,TableB,TableC,TableG (Default =TableG for solids, TableA for

aqueous reactants.)

Position for the second bottle for reaction experiments.

Unknown=Yes,No (Default = No) Specifies if the bottle should be labeled as an unknown.

[Metal]

A-48

Metal=1 A1 Specifies the metal by specifying the metal location. [Drawer ColumnRow] Position=CounterA,CounterB,CounterC,TableD,TableE,TableF,Oven (Default = TableD)

Position of the metal and dish in the laboratory.

[Oven] Not used if bomb experiment is out. On_Off=On,Off (Default = Off) Turns oven on and off. Open_Closed=Open,Closed (Default = Closed)

Sets the oven door as open or closed.

Temperature= (Default = min temp limit) Sets the temperature of the oven in C.

[Balance]

On_Off=On,Off (Default = On) Sets the balance to be on or off. Tare_container=Yes,No (Default = No) Specifies if the weigh paper or beaker mass will be subtracted from balance

reading.

[Beaker1] Not used if bomb experiment is out. Position=TableA,TableB,TableC,TableD,TableE,TableF

Position of the beaker on the table. The default position starts with the first available position.

Bottle=Bottle,Bottle 2 Assigns what is in the beaker. This must be specified. Amount=Random,Volume,Mass Specifies the volume or mass in the beaker. Volume should be a number in

mL for liquids; Mass is a number in grams for solids. Min= Specifies minimum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. Max= Specifies maximum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. [Beaker2] Not used if bomb experiment is out. Used only for reaction experiments. Position=TableA,TableB,TableC,TableD,TableE,TableF

Position of the beaker on the table. The default position starts with the first available position.

Bottle=Bottle,Bottle 2 Assigns what is in the beaker. This must be specified. Amount=Random,Volume,Mass Specifies the volume or mass in the beaker. Volume should be a number in

mL for liquids; Mass is a number in grams for solids. Min= Specifies minimum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts. Max= Specifies maximum amount (mL or g) for Random amounts.

[Paper] Position=Paper,TableF,None (Default=None)

Position of the weigh paper in the laboratory.

Bottle=Bottle,Bottle 2 What is on the paper. This must be assigned to a solid. Amount=Random,Mass Specifies the mass on the paper in grams. If a metal has been selected, then

this is ignored. Min= Specifies minimum amount for Random amounts. Max= Specifies maximum amount for Random amounts.

Example Calorimetry Preset Experiment INI Variables Description [Title]

Title=Heat of Reaction: HCl (aq) + NaOH (s)

Title of experiment.

[General]

Timer=Off Stopwatch window is not open.

[Calorimeter]

Calorimeter=Dewar Selected the dewar as the calorimeter. Thermometer=On Thermometer is on and thermometer window is open. Temperature_K=298.15 Temperature of anything inside calorimeter is set to 25 C.

A-49

Graph_Window=On Graph window is open. Lid=On The lid to the calorimeter is on. Stirring=On Stirring is turned on. Position=Table The calorimeter is placed on the table. Water=.100 There is 100 mL of water in the calorimeter.

[Bottle]

Filename=Reaction2.ini Reaction postion 2 is used for reactants. Position=CounterA Position of bottle 1 is on the counter. Bottle2_Position=TableG Position of bottle 2 is on the Table in position G.

[Beaker1]

Position=TableB A beaker is placed on the table in location B. Bottle=Bottle The beaker is filled with bottle 1. Amount=0.100 The amount is 100 mL.

[Balance]

On_Off=On The balance is turned on. Tare_container=Yes The weigh paper is tared.

[Paper]

Position=TableF The weigh paper is on the balance. Bottle=Bottle 2 The solid from bottle 2 is on the weigh paper. Amount=Random A random amount is selected. Amount_Min=3.999 The minimum value. Amount_Max=4.000 The maximum value.

Figure A1. Position labels for calorimetry INI variables.

A-50

Mechanics INI File

The mechanics laboratory allows students the ability to perform realistic mechanical experiments

in a controlled environment of their pleasing. Much of the experiments are controlled using the

laboratory INI file however, there are presets that will be determined by their own preset INI

files. These presets INI are described below. The variables contained in the laboratory INI file

are explained below. Note that each variable has its own default and max/min values. The

purpose for providing this information is to grant instructors the ability to change or adjust the

mechanics simulation to suit their own needs.

Mechanics.ini INI Variables Description

[General] DisplaySigFig=3 The significant digits that will be displayed in the work area display boxes. AccelerationValues=0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500

The acceleration factor which time will be multiplied by to increase the speed of the experiment. The time acceleration display will rotate through in this order.

AccelerationDefault=1 The starting value for lab time acceleration. Must correspond with one of the defined acceleration values.

LabbookSigFig=4 The number of significant digits to be stored in the labbook. PlanetAccelerationValues=pa1d, pa10d, pa30d, pa100d, pa1y, pa10y, pa100y

The time acceleration values used in planetary simulations. d = day, y = year.

pa1d_Label=1 Day The label that will be displayed for 1 Day increments. pa1d_sec=84600 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa10d_Label=10 Days The label that will be displayed for 10 Day increments. pa10d_sec=846000 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa30d_Label=30 Days The label that will be displayed for 30 Day increments. pa30d_sec=2592000 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa100d_Label=100 Days The label that will be displayed for 100 Day increments. pa100d_sec=8460000 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa1y_Label=1 Year The label that will be displayed for 1 Year increments. pa1y_sec=31557600 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa10y_Label=10 Years The label that will be displayed for 10 Year increments. pa10y_sec=315576000 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. pa100y_Label=100 Years The label that will be displayed for 100 Year increments. pa100y_sec=3155760000 The number of seconds per chosen acceleration value. Planet_Auto_Increment_Time=5 The number of seconds that pass between auto time increment. [Grid] Red=100 Color of grid lines. Green=100 Color of grid lines. Blue=100 Color of grid lines. Transparency=50 The transparency of the grid lines on the screen. Label_Red=25 Grid label colors. Label_Green=25 Grid label colors.

A-51

Label_Blue=25 Grid label colors. Label_Transparency=50 Transparency label colors. P_Red=200 Planet grid line color. P_Green=100 Planet grid line color. P_Blue=100 Planet grid line color. P_Transparency=15 Planet grid lines transparency. P_Label_Red=200 Label for planet grid line colors. P_Label_Green=100 Label for planet grid line colors. P_Label_Blue=100 Label for planet grid line colors. P_Label_Transparency=100 Planet transparency grid label color. Startx1=-10 The initial coordinates for the grid (Y-axis calculated from the x-axis). Startx2=10 The initial coordinates for the grid (Y-axis calculated from the x-axis). AutoScaleFactor=4 The multiplication factor for auto scaling the grid size. [Materials] materials=wood,plastic,metal,cement,rubber The materials available in the lab. wood_label=Wood The label shown for this material. plastic_label=Plastic The label shown for this material. metal_label=Metal The label shown for this material. rubber_label=Rubber The label shown for this material. [Ball] m=10 The mass of the ball. m_min=0.0001 The minimum mass of the ball. m_max=1000000 The maximum mass of the ball. r=0.5 The radius of the ball. r_min=0.001 The minimum radius of the ball. r_max=100 The maximum radius of the ball. v0=0.0 The initial velocity of the ball. Beta=0.0 The initial angle of velocity. A 0 radian angle is with respect to the positive x-

axis, moving counterclockwise through the quadrants from 0-2Pi radians. material=metal The default material for the ball. sphere=solid The type of sphere the ball is. It can either be a solid sphere or a shell, with all

the mass distribution on the shell. The options are either solid or thin. min_pixel_r=8 The minimum pixel radius the ball can be when at the minimum radius. AllowsideAV=1 The angular velocity graphic is on or off. This shows the ball rotating when the

ball is moving on the ramp, but not in the point of perfect rolling without slipping yet. 1=on, 2=off.

[MultipleBalls] mn=10 The mass of each ball in the multiple ball simulation. mn_min=0.001 The minimum mass of each ball. mn_max=1000000 The maximum mass of each ball. rn=0.5 The radius of each ball. rn_min=0.001 The minimum radius of each ball. rn_mx=1000 The maximum radius of each ball. [Forces] Fi=1000000 The default force if not specified in the individual experiment sections. Fi_min=0 The minimum magnitude of force (newtons). Fi_max=1000000 The maximum magnitude of force (newtons). Fi_rocket=100 The magnitude of the rocket force. Fi_plunger=3000 The magnitude of the plunger force. phi=0 The angle of applied force. A 0 radian angle is with respect to the positive x-

axis, moving counterclockwise through the quadrants from 0-2Pi radians.

A-52

phi_min=0 The minimum angle of applied force. phi_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle of applied force. rocketTime=1 The number of seconds the rocket force is applied per click, or fire. plungerTime=0.05 The number of seconds the plunger force is applied. [Frictions] wood_wood=0.55 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. wood_plastic=0.33 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. wood_cement=0.62 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. wood_rubber=0.96 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. plastic_wood=0.33 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. plastic_plastic=0.15 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. plastic_metal=0.45 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. plastic_cement=0.25 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. plastic_rubber=0.85 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. metal_wood=0.38 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. metal_plastic=0.45 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. metal_metal=0.52 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. metal_cement=0.30 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. metal_rubber=0.90 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. cement_wood=0.62 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. cement_plastic=0.25 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. cement_metal=0.30 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. cement_cement=0.55 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. cement_rubber=0.89 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. rubber_wood=0.96 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. rubber_plastic=0.85 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. rubber_metal=0.90 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. rubber_cement=0.89 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. rubber_rubber=1.00 The coefficient of friction between the two materials. P=101325 The default pressure (Pa) at sea level. P_min=0 The minimum pressure allowed (Pa). This pressure would correspond to an

altitude of below sea level, but we just leave the altitude at 0 for all low pressures.

P_max=10132500 The maximum pressure allowed. Z=0 The altitude of the experiment (m) above sea level. Z_min=0 The minimum altitude of the experiments (m). Z_mx=44642 The maximum altitude of the experiments. [Gravity] gx=9.80665 The magnitude of gravity in the direction of the (+) x-axis (m/s^2). gx_min=-300 The minimum magnitude of x axis gravity. gx_max=300 The maximum magnitude of x axis gravity. gy=9.80665 The magnitude of gravity in the direction of the (-) y-axis. gy_min=-300 The minimum magnitude of y axis gravity. gy_max=300 The maximum magnitude of y axis gravity. gr=9.80665 The magnitude of gravity in the radial direction. gr_min=-300 The minimum magnitude of radial gravity. gr_max=300 The maximum magnitude of radial gravity. g_multiplier=0.101971621298 The multiplier to set the number of g’s per chosen gravity value. planetList=Sun,Mercury,Venus,Earth,Mars, The list of names to show in the parameters palette for gravities.

A-53

Jupiter,Saturn,Uranus,Neptune,Pluto gravityList= 274.13,3.59,8.87,9.80665,1.62, 3.77,25.95,11.08,10.67,14.07,0.42

The list of corresponding gravities to the planetList. Must be in same order as the planetList.

[Ramp] theta=0.78539816339745 The default angle of the ramp (radians). theta_min=0 The minimum angle of the ramp. theta_mx=1.57079633 The maximum angle of the ramp. L=50 The length of the ramp (m). L_min=1 The minimum length of the ramp. L_max=10000 The maximum length of the ramp. Material=wood The material of the ramp. Choices in material section above. YAxisPlacement=1.3 The angle (radians) above which the object placement is controlled by the y

location of the mouse. [Rod] theta=0.005 The starting angle of the rod from the positive y axis (radians). theta_min=0 The minimum angle of the rod. theta_mx=1.57079633 The maximum angle of the rod. r=1.5 The radius of the rod (m). r_min=0.1 The minimum radius of the rod. r_max=1000 The maximum radius of the rod. l=20 The length of the rod. l_min=1 The minimum length of the rod. l_max=100000 The maximum length of the rod. material=brickmortar The initial material of the rod. Options below. materials=wood, cement, glass, titanium, aluminum, castiron, brickmortar

The options for material of the rod.

wood_label=Wood The label for the wood material. wood_tensile=35200000 The tensile strength for wood material (Pa). wood_density=518 The density of the wood material (kg/m^3). cement_label= Cement The label for the material. cement _tensile=3500000 The tensile strength for material. cement _density=2320 The density of the material. glass_label= Glass The label for the material. glass _tensile=3600000000 The tensile strength for material. glass _density=2530 The density of the material. titanium_label= Titanium The label for the material. titanium _tensile=830000000 The tensile strength for material. titanium_density=4510 The density of the material. aluminum_label= Aluminum The label for the material. aluminum _tensile=180000000 The tensile strength for material. aluminum _density=2700 The density of the material. castiron_label= Cast Iron The label for the material. castrion _tensile=200000000 The tensile strength for material. castiron _density=6800 The density of the material. Brickmortar_label= Brick and Mortar The label for the material. Brickmortar _tensile=689000 The tensile strength for material. Brickmortar _density=1840 The density of the material.

A-54

[Sled] m=10 The mass of the sled (kg). m_min=0.001 The minimum mass of the sled. m_max=1000000 The maximum mass of the sled. Ls=2 The length of the sled (m). Ls_min=0.1 The minimum length of the sled. Ls_max=100 The maximum length of the sled. h=1 The height of the sled (m). h_min=0.1 The minimum height of the sled. h_max=100 The maximum height of the sled. w=0.5 The width of the sled (m). w_min=0.1 The minimum width of the sled. w_max=100 The maximum width of the sled. v0=0.0 The initial velocity of the sled (m/s). Beta=0.0 The initial angle of velocity (rad). material=metal The material of the sled. min_pixel_h=8 The minimum pixel height the sled can be. [UnitTime] s=1 The base unit is in seconds. min=60 The number of seconds in a minute. hr=3600 The number of seconds in an hour. day=86400 The number of seconds in a day. yr=31557600 The number of seconds in a year. [UnitTimeLabel] s=s The label shown for seconds is “s”. min=min The label shown for minute is “min”. hr=hr The label for hour. day=day The label for day. yr=yr The label for year. [UnitPosition] m=1 The base unit is in meters. cm=100 The number of centimeters in a meter. km=0.001 The number of kilometers in a meter. in=39.37007 The number of inches in a meter. ft=3.28083 The number of feet in a meter. yd=1.09361 The number of yards in a meter. mi=0.0006213711 The number of miles in a meter. AU=0.0000000000066845871226706 The number of astronomical units in a meter. Lyr=0.00000000000000010570008340 The number of light-years in a meter. [UnitPositionLabel] m=m The label for meters. cm=cm The label for centimeters. km=km The label for kilometers. in=in The label for inches. ft=ft The label for feet. yd=yd The label for yards. mi=mi The label for miles. AU=AU The label for astronomical units. Lyr=Lyr The label for light-years. [UnitMass] kg=1 The base unit is in kilograms

A-55

g=1000 The number of grams in a kilogram. Mg=.001 The number of megagrams in a kilogram. oz=35.274 The number of ounces in a kilogram. lbs=2.20462262 The number of pounds in a kilogram. T=.001102 The number of tons in a kilogram. slg=.068522 The number of slugs in a kilogram. [UnitMassLabel] kg=kg The label for kilogram. g=g The label for grams. Mg=Mg The label for megagrams. oz=oz The label for ounces. lbs=lbs The label for pounds. T=Tons The label for tons. slg=slugs The label for slugs. [UnitForce] N=1 The base unit is in newtons. dyn=100000 The number of dynes in a newton. PF=.22480 The number of pounds-force in a newton. TF=.0001124 The number of tons-force in a newton. [UnitForceLabel] N=N The label for newtons. dyn=dyn The label for dynes. PF=lbs-F The label for pounds-force. TF=Tons-F The label for tons-force. [UnitVelocity] m_s=1 The base unit is meters per second. Km_s=.001 The number of kilometers per second in a meter per second. Km_hr=3.60 The number of kilometers per hour in a meter per second. ft_s=3.28083 The number of feet per second in a meter per second. mi_s=.0006214 The number of miles per second in a meter per second. mi_hr=2.2369363 The number of miles per hour in a meter per second. AU_yr=4743.739 The number of astronomical units per year in a meter per second. [UnitVelocityLabel] m_s=m/s The label for meter per second. Km_s=km/s The label for kilometer per second. Km_hr=km/hr The label for kilometer per hour. ft_s=ft/s The label for feet per second. mi_s=mi/s The label for miles per second. mi_hr=mi/hr The label for miles per hour. AU_yr=AU/yr The label for astronomical units per year. [UnitAirPressure] atm=0.00000986923169314269 The number of atmosphere per pascal. Pa=1 The base unit is pascals. [UnitAirPressureLabel] atm=atm The label for atmospheres. Pa=Pa The label for pascals. [UnitTemperatureLabel] C=C The label for Celsius.

A-56

F=F The label for Fahrenheit. K=K The label for Kelvin. [UnitAngles] R=1 The base unit is radians. D=57.297 The number of degrees in a radian. [UnitAnglesLabel] R=rad The label for radians. D=Degrees The label for degrees. [ProjectileMotionBallExperiment] X0=0 The initial x coordinate of the object. X0_min=-1000000 The minimum x coordinate allowed. X0_max=1000000 The maximum x coordinate allowed. Y0=0 The initial y coordinate of the object. Y0_min=-1000000 The minimum y coordinate allowed. Y0_max=1000000 The maximum y coordinate allowed. V0=0.0 The initial velocity of the object (m/s). V0_min=0 The minimum velocity of the object. V0_max=300000000 The maximum velocity of the object. Beta=0.78539816 The initial angle of velocity of the object (rad). Counter-clockwise from + x axis. Beta_min=0 The minimum angle for velocity. Beta_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle for velocity. Fi=0 The initial force applied to object. Fi_min=0 The minimum force allowed. Fi_max=1000 The maximum force allowed. phi=0.0 The angle of applied force (rad). Counter-clockwise from + x axis. phi_min=0 The minimum angle of applied force. phi_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle of applied force. P=101325 The initial pressure of air (Pa). P_min=0 The minimum pressure of air. P_max=10132500 The maximum pressure of air. Z=0 The initial altitude of experiment (m). Z_min=0 The minimum altitude. Z_max=44642 The maximum altitude. gx=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the x axis (m/s^2). gx_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gx_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. gy=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the y axis (m/s^2). gy_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gy_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. gr=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration radially towards the center of the screen, the

origin (m/s^2). gr_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gr_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration.

A-57

[RampMotionExperiment] X0=0 The initial x coordinate of the object. X0_min=-1000000 The minimum x coordinate allowed. X0_max=1000000 The maximum x coordinate allowed. Y0=0 The initial y coordinate of the object. Y0_min=-1000000 The minimum y coordinate allowed. Y0_max=1000000 The maximum y coordinate allowed. V0=0 The initial velocity of the object along the ramp (m/s^2). V0_min=-300000000 The minimum velocity of the object. V0_max=300000000 The maximum velocity of the object. theta=0.0 The default angle of the ramp (rad). theta_min=0 The minimum angle of the ramp. theta_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle of the ramp. Fi=0 The force applied to the object (N). Fi_min=0 The minimum force allowed. Fi_max=1000 The maximum force allowed. P=101325 The default pressure of air (Pa). P_min=0 The minimum pressure allowed. P_max=10132500 The maximum pressure allowed. Z=0 The default altitude-sea level (m). Z_min=0 The minimum altitude allowed. Z_max=44642 The maximum altitude allowed. gx=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the x axis (m/s^2). gx_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gx_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. gy=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the y axis (m/s^2). gy_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gy_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. gr=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration radially towards the center (m/s^2). gr_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gr_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. d=1 The distance below the surface of the ramp the radial sink is located-projected

perpendicular to the ramp surface (m) d_min=0 The minimum distance radial sink is located. d_max=10 The maximum distance the radial sink is located. uk=0.38 The default coefficient of friction. uk_min=0 The minimum coefficient of friction. uk_max=1 The maximum coefficient of friction. phi=0 The angle the ball is rotated with respect to zero point-since the ball is

symmetrical this is not evident (rad). phi_min=0 The minimum angle allowed. phi_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle allowed. AVO = 0.0 The initial angular velocity of ball (rad/s). dAV0 = 0.0 The initial angular acceleration of the ball (rad/s^2).

A-58

ball_radial_factor=1.0 Coefficients in the equations of motion. Do not change. sled_radial_factor=1.0 Coefficients in the equations of motion. Do not change. [BucketBallsExperiment] MaxBalls=15 The Maximum number of balls allowed. X0=0 The initial x position of a ball (m). X0_min=-1000000 The minimum x coordinate allowed. Must be inside the walls. X0_max=1000000 The maximum x corrdinate allowe. Must be inside the walls. Y0=0 The initial y coordinate of the ball (m). Y0_min=-1000000 The minimum y coordinate allowed. Must be inside the walls. Y0_max=1000000 The maximum y coordinate allowed. Must be inside the walls. V0=0 The initial velocity of ball (m/s). V0_min=-300000000 The minimum velocity of ball. V0_max=300000000 The maximum velocity of ball. vmin=0.000001 The minimum velocity allowed for the ball. Beta=0 The initial angle of velocity. A 0 radian angle is with respect to the positive x-

axis, moving counterclockwise through the quadrants from 0-2Pi radians. Beta_min=0 The minimum angle of velocity. Beta_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle of velocity. Width=20 The width of the table area bordered by the walls (m). Must be greater than

zero. Width_min=1 The minimum width of the work area. Width_max=10000 The maximum width of the work area. Height=20 The height of the table area bordered by the walls (m). Must be greater than

zero. Height_min=1 The minimum height of the work area. Height_max=10000 The maximum height of the work area. Fi=0 The initial force applied to ball (N). Fi_min=0 The minimum force allowed. Fi_max=50 The maximum force allowed. phi=0.0 The initial angle of applied force. A 0 radian angle is with respect to the

positive x-axis, moving counterclockwise through the quadrants from 0-2Pi radians.

phi_min=0 The minimum angle of applied force. phi_max=6.28318531 The maximum angle of applied force. surface_material=wood The material of the surface. Must be one listed in materials section. ball_material=metal The material of the balls. Must be one listed in the materials section. MaxBall1D=3 The maximum number of balls allowed for 1-d motion. Otherwise default 2-d. gx=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the x axis (m/s^2). gx_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gx_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration. gy=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration along the y axis (m/s^2). gy_min=0 The minimum gravitational acceleration. gy_max=300 The maximum gravitational acceleration.

A-59

g=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration into the screen (m/s^2). This is what is holding the ball on the surface. Graphic is not shown.

g_min=0 The minimum value for gravitational acceleration into the screen. g_max=300 The maximum value for gravitational acceleration into the screen. uk=0.38 Default coefficient of friction. uk_min=0 The minimum value for coefficient of friction. uk_max=5 The maximum value for coefficient of friction. k=1 The default coefficient of elasticity. k_min=0 The minimum coefficient of elasticity. Totally inelastic. k_max=1 The maximum coefficient of elasticity. Totally elastic. b1_m=10 The mass for ball 1 (kg). b1_r=0.5 The radius for ball 1 (m). b1_x=0 The x coordinate for ball 1 (m). b1_y=0 The y coordinate for ball 1. b1_vx=0 The x velocity for ball 1 (m/s^2). b1_vy=0 The y velocity for ball 1. b1_F=0 Indicates if force is attached to ball 1. 1=yes. 0=no. Only one force can be

applied to one of the balls at a time. b2_m=10 The mass for ball 2. b2_r=0.5 The radius for ball 2. b2_x=0 The x coordinate for ball 2. b2_y=0 The y coordinate for ball 2. b2_vx=0 The x velocity for ball 2. b2_vy=0 The y velocity for ball 2. b2_F=0 Indicates if force is attached to ball 2. 1=yes. 0=no. Only one force to one ball

at time. b3_m=10 The mass for ball 3. b3_r=0.5 The radius for ball 3. b3_x=0 The x coordinate for ball 3. b3_y=0 The y coordinate for ball 3. b3_vx=0 The x velocity for ball 3. b3_vy=0 The y velocity for ball 3. b3_F=0 Indicates if force is attached to ball 3. 1=yes. 0=no. Only one force to one ball



A-60







at time.

A-61

b12_m=10 The mass for ball 12. b12_r=0.5 The radius for ball 12. b12_x=0 The x coordinate for ball 12. b12_y=0 The y coordinate for ball 12. b12_vx=0 The x velocity for ball 12. b12_vy=0 The y velocity for ball 12. b12_F=0 Indicates if force is attached to ball 12. 1=yes. 0=no. Only one force to one ball




at time. [RodExperiment] DividePoints=20 The number of sections to divide the rod into for calculations. TestPoints = 10 The number of sections to test on the rod out of the total number of divided

sections. g=9.80665 The value of the gravitational constant for rod experiment (m/s^2). g_min=0 The minimum value for the gravitational constant. g_max=300 The maximum value for the gravitational constant. [PlanetExperiment] sun_mass=1.98892e30 The mass of the sun (kg). sun_mass_min=1e25 The minimum mass of sun. sun_mass_max=1e45 The maximum mass of sun. sun_spin=0.04 The amount of spin for the sun graphic. time_min=0 The minimum date allowed in the planetary simulation. Year=0. time_max=4000 The maximum date allowed in the planetary simulation. Year=4000. CalculateAll=1 Calculate all of the data for each planet. 1=yes.0=no. Use 0 for slower

computers to speed up computations.

A-62

a=1e10 The semi-major axis default (m). a_min=1e9 The minimum semi-major axis. a_max=1e14 The maximum semi-major axis. E=.1 The default eccentricity. E_min=0 The minimum eccentricity. E_max=1.0 The maximum eccentricity. mass=1e6 The default mass of planet (kg). mass_min=1e6 The minimum mass of planet. mass_max=1e45 The maximum mass of planet. inclination=0 The inclination of the orbit with respect to the Earth-Sun plane (degrees). inclination_min=0 The minimum inclination. inclination_max=180 The maximum inclination. X0=0 The initial starting position x coordinate (m). X0_min=-1e15 The minimum x coordinate. X0_max=1e15 The maximum x coordinate. Y0=0 The initial starting position y coordinate (m). Y0_min=-1e15 The minimum y coordinate. Y0_max=1e15 The maximum y coordinate. [PlanetMercury] mass=3.3022e23 The mass of Mercury (kg). a=5.791e10 The semi-major axis of Mercury (m). E=.20563 The eccentricity of the orbit of Mercury. Inclination=7 The inclination of the orbit of Mercury. X0=-0.27856 The initial x coordinate of Mercury-this is from the starting day of Jan 1, 2006

(AU). Y0=-0.36032 The initial y coordinate of Mercury-this is from the starting day of Jan 1, 2006

(AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and

negative y values for the same x. The program only places the planet initially according to the x value. = Above x axis. - = Below x axis.

spin=0.01705140316 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons= The moons associated with Mercury. None allowed. [PlanetVenus] The mass of Venus (kg). mass=4.869e24 The semi-major axis of Venus (m). a=10.821e10 The eccentricity of the orbit of Venus. E=.0067 The inclination of the orbit of Venus. Inclination=3.39 The initial x coordinate of Venus- this is from the starting day of Jan 1, 2006

(AU). X0=-0.03285 The initial y coordinate of Venus - this is from the starting day of Jan 1, 2006

(AU). Y0=0.71867 The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and

negative y values. The program only places the planet initially according to the x value. = Above x axis. - = Below x axis.

spin=0.004114913062 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons= The moons associated with Venus. None allowed. [PlanetEarth] mass=5.9742e24 The mass of Earth (kg).

A-63

a=14.96e10 The semi-major axis of Earth (m). E=.0167 The eccentricity of the orbit of Earth. Inclination=0 The inclination of the orbit of Earth. X0=-0.17789 The x coordinate of Earth (AU). Y0=0.96713 The y coordinate of Earth. spin=1 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Moon The moons associated with Earth. Options: Moon [PlanetMars] mass=6.4191e23 The mass of Mars. a=22.792e10 The semi-major axis of Mars. E=.0935 The eccentricity of the orbit of Mars. Inclination=1.85 The inclination of the orbit of Mars. X0=0.40626 The initial x coordinate of Mars. Y0=1.47623 The initial y coordinate of Mars. spin=1.00273948427 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Deimos,Phobos The moons associated with Mars. Options: Deimos,Phobos [PlanetJupiter] mass=1.8988e27 The mass of Jupiter. a=77.857e10 The semi-major axis of Jupiter. E=.0489 The eccentricity of the orbit of Jupiter. Inclination=1.3 The inclination of the orbit of Jupiter. X0=-4.47847 The initial x coordinate of Jupiter. Y0=-3.08624 The initial y coordinate of Jupiter. Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


spin=2.41815733794 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Callisto,Europa,Ganymede,Io The moons associated with Jupiter. Options: Callisto,Europa,Ganymede,Io [PlanetSaturn] The mass of Saturn. mass=5.685e26 The semi-major axis of Saturn. a=143.353e10 The eccentricity of the orbit of Saturn. E=.0565 The inclination of the orbit of Saturn. Inclination=2.49 The initial x coordinate of Saturn. X0=-5.46407 The initial y coordinate of Saturn. Y0=7.2853 The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


spin=2.25220528566 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Enceladus,Iapetus,Mimas,Titan The moons associated with Saturn. Options:Enceladus,Iapetus,Mimas,Titan [PlanetUranus] mass=8.6625e25 The mass of Uranus. a=287.246e10 The semi-major axis of Uranus. E=.0457 The eccentricity of the orbit of Uranus. Inclination=.77 The inclination of the orbit of Uranus. X0=18.8727 The initial x coordinate of Uranus. Y0=-6.83659 The initial y coordinate of Uranus. Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


spin=1.39211136956 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Titania,Miranda,Oberon The moons associated with Uranus. Options:Titania,Miranda,Oberon

A-64

[PlanetNeptune] mass=1.0278e26 The mass of Neptune. a=449.506e10 The semi-major axis of Neptune. E=.0113 The eccentricity of the orbit of Neptune. Inclination=1.77 The inclination of the orbit of Neptune. X0=22.0093 The initial x coordinate of Neptune. Y0=-20.4713 The initial y coordinate of Neptune. Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


spin=1.48975791434 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Triton The moons associated with Neptune. Option: Triton [PlanetPluto] mass=1.314e22 The mass of Pluto. a=590.638e10 The semi-major axis of Pluto. E=.2488 The eccentricity of the orbit of Pluto. Inclination=17.15 The inclination of the orbit of Pluto. X0=-3.00077 The initial x coordinate of Pluto. Y0=-30.6266 The initial y coordinate of Pluto. Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


spin=0.156568028809 The rotational period based off of 1 being the spin of the Earth. moons=Charon The moons associated with Pluto. Option: Charon [Planet] mass=6e24 The mass of the Planet. a=2 The semi-major axis of the Planet. E=.15 The eccentricity of the Planet. Inclination= The inclination of the orbit of the Planet. X0=-3.00077 The x coordinate of the Planet . moons= The moons associated the Planet. Option: none. [PlanetHalleysComet] mass=1.7e15 The mass of Halley’s Comet. a=268.379E+10 The semi-major axis Halley’s Comet. E=.9673 The eccentricity of the orbit of Halley’s Comet. Inclination=162.24 The inclination of the orbit of Halley’s Comet. X0=28.04863505 The x coordinate of Halley’s Comet. moons= The moons associated with Halley’s Comet. None allowed. [MoonMoon] Mass=7.3349e22 The mass of the Moon (kg). E=.0549 The eccentricity of the orbit of the Moon. Inclination=5.145 The inclination of the orbit of the Moon. R=1.74e6 The radius of the Moon (m) a=3.844e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of the Moon. X0=-.17697 The initial x coordinate of the Moon (AU). Y0=.96490 The initial y coordinate of the Moon (AU). [MoonDeimos] Mass=5e11 The mass of Deimos (kg). E=0.0 The eccentricity of the orbit of Deimos. Inclination=1.8 The inclination of the orbit of Deimos. R=4e3 The radius of Deimos (m).

A-65

a=2.3495e7 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Deimos. X0=.40626 The initial x coordinate of Deimos (AU). Y0=1.47607 The initial y coordinate of the Deimos (AU). OrbitReset=.05 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonPhobos] Mass=1.05e16 The mass of Phobos (kg). E=.01 The eccentricity of Phobos. Inclination=1 The inclination of the orbit of Phobos. R=6e3 The radius of Phobos (m) a=9.378e6 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Phobos. X0=.40620 The initial x coordinate of Phobos (AU). Y0=1.47622 The initial y coordinate of Phobos (AU). OrbitReset=.05 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonCallisto] Mass=1.076e23 The mass of Callisto (kg). E=.007 The eccentricity of Callisto. Inclination=.51 The inclination of the orbit of Callisto. R=2.4e6 The radius of Callisto (m) a=1.883e9 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Callisto. X0=-4.49089 The initial x coordinate of Callisto (AU). Y0=-3.08874 The initial y coordinate of Callisto (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and

negative y values. + = Above x axis. - = Below x axis. OrbitReset=10 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonEuropa] Mass=4.8e22 The mass of Europa (kg). E=.009 The eccentricity of Europa. Inclination=.47 The inclination of the orbit of Europa. R=1.569e6 The radius of Europa (m) a=6.709e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Europa. X0=-4.47986 The initial x coordinate of Europa (AU). Y0=-3.09054 The initial y coordinate of Europa (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonGanymede] Mass=1.482e23 The mass of Ganymede (kg). E=.0015 The eccentricity of Ganymede. Inclination=.21 The inclination of the orbit of Ganymede. R=2.631e6 The radius of Ganymede (m) a=1.07e9 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Ganymede. X0=-4.47229 The initial x coordinate of Ganymede (AU). Y0=-3.08984 The initial y coordinate of Ganymede (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions.

A-66

[MoonIo] Mass=8.93e22 The mass of Io (kg). E=.004 The eccentricity of Io. Inclination=.04 The inclination of the orbit of Io. R=1.818e6 The radius of Io (m) a=4.216e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Io. X0=-4.47805 The initial x coordinate of Io (AU). Y0=-3.08902 The initial y coordinate of Io (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonEnceladus] Mass=8.4e19 The mass of Enceladus (kg). E=.00452 The eccentricity of Enceladus. Inclination=0 The inclination of the orbit of Enceladus. R=2.5e5 The radius of Enceladus (m) a=2.3804e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Enceladus. X0=-5.46372 The initial x coordinate of Enceladus (AU). Y0=7.28666 The initial y coordinate of Enceladus (AU). OrbitReset=10 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonIapetus] Mass=1.88e21 The mass of Iapetus (kg). E=.028 The eccentricity of Iapetus. Inclination=7.52 The inclination of the orbit of Iapetus. R=7.30e5 The radius of Iapetus (m) a=3.5608e9 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Iapetus. X0=-5.46279 The initial x coordinate of Iapetus (AU). Y0=7.30821 The initial y coordinate of Iapetus (AU). OrbitReset=10 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonMimas] Mass=3.8e19 The mass of Mimas (kg). E=.0202 The eccentricity of Mimas. Inclination=1.53 The inclination of the orbit of Mimas. R=1.96e5 The radius of Mimas (m) a=1.8554e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Mimas. X0=-5.46410 The initial x coordinate of Mimas (AU). Y0=7.28642 The initial y coordinate of Mimas (AU). OrbitReset=10 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonTitan] Mass=1.35e23 The mass of Titan (kg). E=.0292 The eccentricity of Titan. Inclination=.33 The inclination of the orbit of Titan. R=2.575e6 The radius of Titan (m) a=1.22186e9 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Titan. X0=-5.46105 The initial x coordinate of Titan (AU). Y0=7.27859 The initial y coordinate of Titan (AU). OrbitReset=10 The number of years to elapse before the orbit resets to the original initial

position due to the multi-body interactions.

A-67

[MoonTitania] Mass=3.52e21 The mass of Titania (kg). E=.0022 The eccentricity of Titania. Inclination=.14 The inclination of the orbit of Titania. R=7.9e5 The radius of Titania (m) a=4.38e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Titania. X0=18.8755 The initial x coordinate of Titania (AU). Y0=-6.83724 The initial y coordinate of Titania (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonMiranda] Mass=6.33e19 The mass of Miranda (kg). E=.003 The eccentricity of Miranda. Inclination=4.22 The inclination of the orbit of Miranda. R=2.36e5 The radius of Miranda (m) a=1.3e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Miranda. X0=18.8729 The initial x coordinate of Miranda (AU). Y0=-6.83648 The initial y coordinate of Miranda (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonOberon] Mass=3.01e21 The mass of Oberon (kg). E=.0008 The eccentricity of Oberon. Inclination=.1 The inclination of the orbit of Oberon. R=7.63e5 The radius of Oberon (m) a=5.834e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Oberon. X0=18.8721 The initial x coordinate of Oberon (AU). Y0=-6.83700 The initial y coordinate of Oberon (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonTriton] Mass=2.14e22 The mass of Triton (kg). E=.000016 The eccentricity of Triton. Inclination=157.345 The inclination of the orbit of Triton. R=1.352e6 The radius of Triton (m) a=3.55e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Triton. X0=22.0071 The initial x coordinate of Triton (AU). Y0=-20.4712 The initial y coordinate of Triton (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [MoonCharon] Mass=1.62e21 The mass of Charon (kg). E=.0003 The eccentricity of Charon.

A-68

Inclination=96.16 The inclination of the orbit of Charon. R=5.93e5 The radius of Charon (m) a=1.9571e8 The semi-major axis of the orbit of Charon. X0=-3.00089 The initial x coordinate of Charon (AU). Y0=-30.6267 The initial y coordinate of Charon (AU). Y0_Hemi=- The check for initial position since a circle can have positive y values and


position due to the multi-body interactions. [FreeMotionUniformGravityBall] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for free motion uniform gravity experiments with

ball. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 . TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. [FreeMotionUniformGravitySled] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for free motion uniform gravity experiments with

sled. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. [FreeMotionRadialGravityBall] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for free motion radial gravity experiments with ball. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. [FreeMotionRadialGravitySled] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for free motion radial gravity experiments with sled. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOl=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. [RampUniformGravityBall] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for ramp motion uniform gravity experiments with

ball. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. TOLMax=1 The maximum allowed TOL value before it just accepts the value. [RampUniformGravitySled] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for ramp motion uniform gravity experiments with

sled. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. TOLMax=.75 The maximum allowed TOL value before it just accepts the value. [RampRadialGravityBall] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for ramp motion radial gravity experiments with

ball. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed.

A-69

equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. TOLMax=1 The maximum allowed TOL value before it just accepts the value. [RampRadialGravitySled] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for ramp motion radial gravity experiments with

sled. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.007 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. TOLMax=.1 The maximum allowed TOL value before it just accepts the value. [BucketBalls] h=.001 The step size for the Bucket of Balls experiment. hmin=.0000001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 Not used. [FallingRod] h=.01 The Runge Kutta step size for the falling rod experiment. hmin=.00001 The minimum step size allowed. equationTimer_mSec=100 TOL=.00001 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. [Planets] h=86400 The maximum step size for Runge Kutta to use in planetary motion. hmin=.000001 The minimum step sized allowed in Runge Kutta. equationTimer_mSec=75 TOL=1.0 The accuracy of the values being approximated in Runge Kutta. X0_Diff=.01 The accuracy of finding the initial position. [Administrator] Phi0=0 The initial angular velocity of the ball in ramp experiment. Phi0_min=0 The minimum initial angular velocity. Phi0_max=10 The maximum initial angular velocity. [Misc] Cp_ball=.5 The drag coefficient for a generic ball. Cp_sled=1 The drag coefficient for a generic block. alpha=.000155 The linear air resistance constant. row=1.2250 The default air density.

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the mechanics stockroom is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by


returning to the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running. A

preset experiment can also be used for assignments so a student can accept an assignment with

the experiment already set up for them. Preset experiments are intended to provide flexibility for

the instructor so the mechanics simulation can be adapted to the level of the class or the

individual teaching style of the instructor. Several experiments have already been defined and are

installed with the software. This section describes how these files can be modified.

A-70




PhysicsM directory. For the preset experiments used in assignments, these files must be located

in the Assignments/Mechanics directory and can have any name but must have the extension

“.ini”. Information on how to use preset experiments in assignments is given in the “Mechanics












is an example of a preset experiment for a balanced force experiment to show how the variables

can be used.

Complete Mechanics Preset Experiment INI Variable List

[Title] title=Free Motion Radial Gravity – Ball The title for the lab. [General] tray= bucketballs,ramp,air,sliding, rolling, gUp, gDown, gRight, gLeft, gRadial, rocket, plunger, mercury, venus, earth, mars, juptier, saturn, uranus, neptune, pluto, comet

Sets which items are in the tray. (Case sensitive). Remember some are mutually exclusive. They must be placed in this order.

motion= ramp,air,sliding, rolling, gUp, gDown, gRight, gLeft, gRadial, rocket, plunger, mercury, venus, earth, mars, juptier, saturn, uranus, neptune, pluto, comet

Sets which items are in the motion experiment area. (Case sensitive). Items must be placed in order as they appear in the options.

startLoc=motion (or stock, lab) Starting location for the preset. gridx1=-12 The initial coordinates for the grid. X1 is for the negative x values. gridx2=12 x2 on the positive x values. gridy1=-7 Grid y coordinates will be ignored unless we are in free motion (they will

always be scaled to match the x coordinates). y1 is the negative y values. gridy2=7 y2 is the positive y values. coordinate=polar (or Cartesian, cartesianTotal, polarTotal)

The current coordinate system displayed.

labbook=1 The labbook is open or closed. 1=open, 0=closed acceleration=1 (or 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500)

The time acceleration factor to use. Must equal one of the options in the INI file above.

A-71

recordData=a1, b1, a2, b2, a3, b3, a4, b4, a5, b5

The list of cells from the data output table to record in the labbook. The rows are labeled a and b from top to bottom and the columns are numbered 1-5 from left to right.

[Units] time=s (or min,hr, day, yr) The time units used. position=m (or cm, km, in, ft, yrd, mi, AU, lya)

The position units used.

mass=kg (or g, Mg, oz, lbs, T, slg) The mass units used. force=N (or dyn, PF, TF) The force units used. [planet] view=0 (or 1, 2, 3) The view to go to. Options 0 (solar system top), 1 (solar system parallel view),

2 (planet top), 3 (planet inside) size=0 (or 1) Sets the size of the planets. 1=big (enlarged), 0=small (to scale) planet=earth (or any planet) Selected Planet. trackMoon=moon Moon to track. Used ONLY if view = 2 or 3 AND it's planet is specified angle=0 ( between 0 – 360) Angle of view for inside view. date=0 Tells how many days from day 0 year 2006. It can be positive or negative. sun_mass=1.9819e30 Mass of the sun. [ball] m=100 The mass of the ball. r=1.16 The radius of the ball. vx=-5 The velocity in x-direction (ignored for ramp). vy=.2 The velocity in y-direction (ignored for ramp). v=-2 The total velocity - used only for when ball is placed DIRECTLY in motion area

on ramp (ie not on tray) x=-1 The initial x coordinate. y=2 The initial y coordinate. s=10 The position from the bottom of the ramp (x and y coordinates are ignored). material=rubber The material of ball. Must match materials list in INI file. sphere=thin The type of sphere to use. Options: solid or thin. This only makes a difference

for ramp motion for the rotational inertia. [sled] m=100 The mass of the sled. l=10 The length of the sled. h=25 The height of the sled. w=30 The width of the sled. vx=-5 The velocity of the sled in the x direction. vy=.2 The velocity of the sled in the y direction. v=-2 The velocity of the sled along the ramp. x=1 The initial x coordinante of the sled. y=2 The initial y coordinante of the sled. s=10 The initial position along the ramp from the bottom. material=rubber The material of the sled. Must be one of the options in INI file. [rod] theta=.00314 The initial angle of the rod. Angle from 0-1.57079633 r=10 The radius of the rod. l=20 The length of the rod. tensile=689000 The tensile strength of the rod. Units in pascals. density=1000 The density of the material of the rod. material=aluminum This will set tensile and density, if tensile and density variables are missing

from the preset. Must match material in INI file.

A-72

[bucketballs] surface_material=metal The surface material of the table. Must match a material in the INI file. ball_material=plastic The material of the ball. Must match material in the INI file. k=1 The elasticity coefficient. Between 0-1. type=1D The type of experiment being performed. Options: 1D or 2D. # is a number between 1-15. Each ball will have the following information if you want to specify it in a preset. b#_m=10 The mass of ball #. b#_r=0.5 The radius of ball #. b#_x=0 The initial x coordinante of ball #. Ignored if not in motion area. b#_y=0 The initial y coordinante of ball #. Ignored if not in motion area. b#_vx=0 The initial velcosity in the x direction of ball #. b#_vy=0 The initial velocity in the y direction of ball #. b#_motion=1 This indicates if ball is in the motion area. 0=no 1=yes b#_F=1 This indicates if the force is attached to this ball. Can only be attached to one

ball at a time. Ball must be in motion area. 0=no 1=attached b#_Selected=0 Sets if this ball is currently being tracked for display. 0=No. 1=Tracked. [ramp] theta = .33 The angle of the ramp from the x-axis. Options between 0 – 1.570796 rad. L=100 The length of the ramp. material=wood The material of the ramp. [air] P=101325 The pressure of the location of experiment (Pa). This sets the air resistance. Z=5 The altitude of location of experiment (m). [sliding] uk=.23 The coefficient of friction for sliding and rolling with slipping. [rolling] uk=.23 The coefficient of friction for pure rolling without slipping. [gUp] g=9.8 The gravitational acceleration in the up direction (m/s^2). [gDown] g=9.8 The gravitational acceleration in the down direction. [gLeft] g=9.8 The gravitational acceleration in the left direction. [gRight] g=9.8 The gravitational acceleration in the right direction. [gRadial] g=9.8 The gravitational acceleration in the radial direction. d=.5 The distance below the surface of the ramp the radial sink is located-projected

perpendicular to the ramp surface (m) [rocket] Fi=1000 The magnitude of force. time=-1 The time of applied force. -1=continuous. Positive values set the number of

seconds the rocket is applied. angle=.78 The angle of applied force. Overwrittien if there is a ramp chosen at a defined

A-73

angle. The force will be applied at that angle. The sled can only be hit at angles of 0, pi/2, pi, 3*pi/2.

[plunger] Fi=10000 The magnitude of force. angle=.78 The angle of the applied force. Overwritten with sled or ramp. [mercury] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: none. [venus] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: none. [earth] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: moon. [mars] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Deimos, Phobos. [jupiter] hideMoon=io,europa Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Callisto, Europa, Ganymede, Io. [saturn] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Enceladus, Iapetus, Mimas, Titan. [uranus] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Titania, Miranda, Oberon. [neptune] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Triton. [pluto] hideMoon= Sets which moons to NOT display. Options: Charon. [comet]

Example Mechanics Preset Experiment

[Title] title=Balanced Forces The title for the experiment. [General] tray=rolling The items in the tray. motion=ramp, ball, gDown, rocket The items in the motion area. startLoc=motion The current viewing location. gridx1=10 The setup for the grid axis. gridx2=0 gridy1=-7 gridy2=7 coordinate=Polar The current coordinates. labbook=1 The labbook is opened. acceleration=1 The time acceleration value. recordData=a1, b1, a2, b2, a3 The data to record in the labbook. [Units] The current units. time=sec position=m mass=kg force=N [ball] m=100 The mass of the ball. r=1.5 The radius of the ball. vx=0 The initial x velocity of the ball.

A-74

vy=0 The initial y velocity of the ball. v=0 The initial total velocity of the ball. x=0 The initial x coordinate. y=0 The initial y coordinate. s=50 The initial position on the ramp from the bottom. material=wood The material of the ball. sphere=solid The type of ball. [ramp] theta = 1.570796 The angle of the ramp. l=100 The length of the ramp. material=cement The material of the ramp. [rolling] �k=.38 The coefficient of friction. [gDown] g=9.80665 The gravitational acceleration down. [rocket] Fi=849.3 The magnitude of force. time=-1 The time of applied force. angle=3.141592654 The angle of applied force.

Density INI File

The density laboratory allows students the ability to perform realistic density and buoyancy

experiments in a controlled environment of their pleasing. Much of the experiments are

controlled using the laboratory INI file however, there are presets that will be determined by

their own preset INI files. The presets INI are described bleow. The variables contained in the

laboratory INI file are explained below. Note that each variable has its own default max/min

values. The purpose of providing this information is to grant instructors the ability to change or

adjust the density simulation to suit their own needs.

Density.ini INI Variables Description [Balance] Required header line.

BalDigits=3 The number of decimal places available on the balance.

MaxBalance=4.0 The maximum mass that can be weighed on the balance in kg.

Balance_Flicker_Max=.000001 The maximum amount that the balance flickers between readings.

Balance_Flicker_Time=2.5 The time between each flicker in seconds.

[Beaker] Required header line.

Beaker_mass_%dev=5 The percent deviation in weight from the set beaker mass.

MaxBeakerVol=250 The maximum amount of volume a beaker can hold in mL.

Beaker_mass=.100 The set mass for each beaker in g.

[Solids] Required header line.

Object_mass_%dev=0.1 The percent deviation in weight from the set object mass.

radius_min=.015 The minimum radius of the object in meters.

A-75

radius_max=.0172 The maximum radius of the object in meters.

VSolidmindensity=0.1 The minimum density of a random virtual solid (g/mL).

VSolidmaxdensity=25 The maximum density of a random virtual solid (g/mL).

[Fluids] Required header line.

VFluidmindensity=0.1 The minimum density of a random virtual fluid (g/mL).

VFluidmaxdensity=25 The maximum density of a random virtual fluid (g/mL).

VFluidminviscosity=0.000001 The minimum viscosity of a random virtual fluid.

VFluidmaxviscosity=25 The maximum viscosity of a random virtual fluid.

[Cylinder] Required header line.

MaxCylVol=230 The maximum volume fill for the cylinder in mL.

radius=.017841 The radius of the graduated cylinder in meters.

FillVariationMax=4.0 The maximum variation in volume of the filled cylinder in mL.

GlassError_%Dev=0.25 The percent deviation in glassware error.

[Timer] Required header line.

TimeDigits=2 Number of decimil places shown on the timer.

Solids.ini INI Variables Description

[Aluminum] Required header line.

Solid=Aluminum The name of the solid.

Density=2.643 The density of the solid (g/mL).

Color=Aluminum The color of the solid.

Explodes= What liquids the solid explodes in.

[Brass] Required header line.

Solid=Brass The name of the solid.


Color=Brass The color of the solid.


[Brick] Required header line.

Solid=Brick The name of the solid.


Color=Brick The color of the solid.


[Bronze] Required header line.

Solid=Bronze The name of the solid.


Color=Bronze The color of the solid.


[Carbon] Required header line.

A-76

Solid=Carbon The name of the solid.


Color=Carbon The color of the solid.


[Cement] Required header line.

Solid=Cement The name of the solid.


Color=Cement The color of the solid.


[Cesium] Required header line.

Solid=Cesium The name of the solid.


Color=Cesium The color of the solid.

Explodes= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Salt Water, Soda, Water

What liquids the solid explodes in.

[Cherry Wood] Required header line.

Solid=Cherry Wood The name of the solid.

Density=.433 The density of the solid (g/mL).

Color=Cherry Wood The color of the solid.


[Chocolate] Required header line.

Solid=Chocolate The name of the solid.


Color=Chocolate The color of the solid.


[Copper] Required header line.

Solid=Copper The name of the solid.


Color=Copper The color of the solid.


[Cork] Required header line.

Solid=Cork The name of the solid.


Color=Cork The color of the solid.


[Glass] Required header line.

Solid=Glass The name of the solid.

Density=2.579 The density of the solid.

Color=Glass The color of the solid.


A-77

[Gold] Required header line.

Solid=Gold The name of the solid.


Color=gold The color of the solid.


[Granite] Required header line.

Solid=Granite The name of the solid.


Color=Granite The color of the solid.


[Ice] Required header line.

Solid=Ice The name of the solid.


Color=Ice The color of the solid.


[Iron] Required header line.

Solid=Iron The name of the solid.


Color=Iron The color of the solid.


[Ivory] Required header line.

Solid=Ivory The name of the solid.


Color=Ivory The color of the solid.


[Lead] Required header line.

Solid=Lead The name of the solid.


Color=Lead The color of the solid.


[Limestone] Required header line.

Solid=Limestone The name of the solid.


Color=Limestone The color of the solid.


[Mahogany] Required header line.

Solid=Mahogany The name of the solid.


Color=Mahogany The color of the solid.


A-78

[Nickel] Required header line.

Solid=Nickel The name of the solid.


Color=Nickel The color of the solid.


[Pine Wood] Required header line.

Solid=Pine Wood The name of the solid.


Color=Pine Wood The color of the solid.


[Plastic] Required header line.

Solid=Plastic The name of the solid.


Color=Plastic The color of the solid.


[Platinum] Required header line.

Solid=Platinum The name of the solid.


Color=Platinum The color of the solid.


[Red Oak Wood] Required header line.

Solid=Red Oak Wood The name of the solid.


Color=Red Oak Wood The color of the solid.


[Rubber] Required header line.

Solid=Rubber The name of the solid.


Color=Rubber The color of the solid.


[Sodium] Required header line.

Solid=Sodium The name of the solid.


Color=Silicon The color of the solid.

Explodes= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Salt Water, Soda, Water

What liquids the solid explodes in.

[Silver] Required header line.

Solid=Silver The name of the solid.


A-79

Color=silver The color of the solid.


[Steel] Required header line.

Solid=Steel The name of the solid.


Color=Steel The color of the solid.


[Sulfur] Required header line.

Solid=Sulfur The name of the solid.


Color=Sulfur The color of the solid.


[Tin] Required header line.

Solid=Tin The name of the solid.


Color=Tin The color of the solid.


[Titanium] Required header line.

Solid=Titanium The name of the solid.


Color=Titanium The color of the solid.


[Tungsten] Required header line.

Solid=Tungsten The name of the solid.


Color=Tungsten The color of the solid.


[Walnut Wood] Required header line.

Solid=Walnut Wood The name of the solid.


Color=Walnut Wood The color of the solid.


[Zinc] Required header line.

Solid=Zinc The name of the solid.


Color=Zinc The color of the solid.


[Virtual Solid A] Required header line.

Solid=Virtual Solid A The name of the solid.


A-80

Color=Virtual Yellow The color of the solid.


[Virtual Solid B] Required header line.

Solid=Virtual Solid B The name of the solid.


Color=Virtual Red The color of the solid.


[Virtual Solid C] Required header line.

Solid= Virtual Solid C The name of the solid.


Color=Virtual Blue The color of the solid.


[Virtual Solid D] Required header line.

Solid=Virtual Solid D The name of the solid.

Density=10 The density of the solid (g/mL).

Color=Virtual Black The color of the solid.


Colors.ini INI Variables Description [Red] Required header line.

color=Bromine The name for red in this program is Bromine.

[Clear] Required header line

color=clear The name for clear in this program is clear

[Dark Yellow] Required header line

color=CornSyrup The name for dark yellow in this program is CornSyrup.

[Purple] Required header line

color=GrapeSoda The name for purple in this program is GrapeSoda

[Brown] Required header line

Color=MapleSyrup The name for brown in this program is MapleSyrup.

[Honey] Required header line

Color=Honey The name for honey in this program is Honey.

[Silver] Required header line

Color=Mercury The name for silver in this program is Mercury.

[White] Required header line

Color=Milk The name for white in this program is Milk.

A-81

[Dark Brown] Required header line

Color=MotorOil The name for dark brown in this program is MotorOil.

[Yellow] Required header line

Color=OliveOil The name for yellow in this program is OliveOil.

[Black] Required header line

Color=Tar The name for black in this program is tar.

[ClearRed] Required header line

Mix=yes This color is a mix of 2 already listed colors.

Color=Bromine Color one from above in the mix.

Color2=Clear Color two from above in the mix

Color2Blend=20 Percent of the second color that makes up the mix.

[DarkBrownRed] Required header line



Color2=MotorOil Color two from above in the mix


[BrownRed] Required header line



Color2=MapleSyrup Color two from above in the mix


[RedWhite] Required header line



Color2=Milk Color two from above in the mix


[RedPurple] Required header line



Color2=GrapeSoda Color two from above in the mix


[ClearDarkBrown] Required header line


Color=MotorOil Color one from above in the mix.



[YellowDarkBrown] Required header line


Color=MotorOil Color one from above in the mix.

A-82

Color2=OliveOil Color two from above in the mix


[ClearBrown] Required header line


Color=MapleSyrup Color one from above in the mix.



[ClearWhite] Required header line


Color=Milk Color one from above in the mix.



[ClearYellow] Required header line


Color=OliveOil Color one from above in the mix.



[ClearPurple] Required header line


Color=GrapeSoda Color one from above in the mix.



[PurpleWhite] Required header line


Color=GrapeSoda Color one from above in the mix.

Color2=Milk Color two from above in the mix


[BrownPurple] Required header line



Color2=GrapeSoda Color two from above in the mix


[RedYellow] Required header line



Color2=OliveOil Color two from above in the mix


[BrownWhite] Required header line

Mix=Yes This color is a mix of 2 already listed colors.


A-83

color2=Milk Color two from above in the mix


[YellowBrown] Required header line


Color=CornSyrup Color one from above in the mix.

Color2=MotorOil Color two from above in the mix


Fluids.ini INI Variables Description

[Acetone] Required header line.

Solid=Acetone The name of the fluid.

Density=0.78458 The density of the fluid (g/mL).

Viscosity=.000306 The viscosity of the fluid.

Miscible=Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water

The fluids that the fluid in question is miscible with.

Color=clear The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clear, clearpurple, clear, clear

The color of the mixed fluid in the same order as miscibility.

[Alcohol] Required header line.

Fluid= Alcohol The name of the fluid.

Density=.78651 The density of the fluid (g/mL).


Miscible= Acetone, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water



MixColor= clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clear, clearpurple, clear, clear


[Ammonia] Required header line.

Fluid= Ammonia The name of the fluid.



Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water



MixColor= clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear,clear, clear, clear,


A-84

clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clear, clearbrown, clear, clear

[Bromine] Required header line.

Fluid= Bromine The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water


Color=Red The color of the fluid.

MixColor=clearred, clearred, clearred, darkbrownred, clearred, clearred, clearred, clearred, brownred, redwhite, redyellow, clearred, clearred, redpurple, clearred, clearred


[Car Oil] Required header line.

Fluid= Car Oil The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Turpentine


Color=Dark Brown The color of the fluid.

MixColor=cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, darkbrownred, cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, yellowdarkbrown, cleardarkbrown, cleardarkbrown


[Corn Syrup] Required header line.

Fluid= Corn Syrup The name of the fluid.


Viscosity=7 The viscosity of the fluid.

Miscible= The fluids that the fluid in question is miscible with.

Color=Dark Yellow The color of the fluid.

MixColor= The color of the mixed fluid in the same order as miscibility.

[Ethanol] Required header line.

Fluid= Ethanol The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water


Color= clear The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, The color of the mixed fluid in the same order as miscibility.

A-85

cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clear, clearpurple, clear, clear

[Gasoline] Required header line.

Fluid= Gasoline The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Turpentine



MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clearyellow, clear, clear


[Glycerol] Required header line.

Fluid= Glycerol The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup, Milk, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water



MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clear, clearpurple, clear, clear


[Honey] Required header line.

Fluid= Honey The name of the fluid.




Color=Honey The color of the fluid.


[Jet Fuel] Required header line.

Fluid= Jet Fuel The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein, Turpentine



MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clearyellow, clear, clear


[Maple Syrup] Required header line.

A-86

Fluid= Maple Syrup The name of the fluid.


Viscosity=3.2 The viscosity of the fluid.

Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Water


Color=brown The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clearbrown, clearbrown, clearbrown, brownred, clearbrown, clearbrown, brownwhite, clearbrown, clearbrown, brownpurple, clearbrown


[Mercury] Required header line.

Fluid= Mercury The name of the fluid.




Color=silver The color of the fluid.


[Milk] Required header line.

Fluid= Milk The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda, Water


Color=white The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clearwhite, clearwhite, clearwhite, redwhite, clearwhite, clearwhite, brownwhite, clearwhite, clearwhite, purplewhite, clearwhite


[Olive Oil] Required header line.

Fluid= Olive Oil The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Phenolphthalein, Turpentine


Color=yellow The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clearyellow, clearyellow, clearyellow, redyellow, yellowdarkbrown, clearyellow, clearyellow, clearyellow, clearyellow, clearyellow, clearyellow


[Phenolphthalein] Required header line.

Fluid= Phenolphthalein The name of the fluid.



Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Maple Syrup,


A-87

Milk, Olive Oil, Sea Water, Soda, Turpentine, Water


MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clearyellow, clear, clearpurple, clear, clear


[Sea Water] Required header line.

Fluid=Sea Water The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Soda, Water



MixColor= clear,clear, clear, clearred, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clear, clearpurple, clear


[Soda] Required header line.

Fluid= Soda The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Water


Color=Purple The color of the fluid.

MixColor= clearpurple, clearpurple, clearpurple, redpurple, clearpurple, clearpurple, brownpurple, purplewhite, clearpurple, clearpurple, clearpurple


[Tar] Required header line.

Fluid= Tar The name of the fluid.




Color=black The color of the fluid.


[Turpentine] Required header line.

Fluid= Turpentine The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Car Oil, Ethanol, Gasoline, Glycerol, Jet Fuel, Olive Oil, Phenolphthalein



MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, cleardarkbrown, clear, clear, clear, clear,


A-88

clearyellow, clear

[Water] Required header line.

Fluid= Water The name of the fluid.



Miscible= Acetone, Alcohol, Ammonia, Bromine, Ethanol, Glycerol, Maple Syrup, Milk, Phenolphthalein, Sea Water, Soda



MixColor= clear, clear, clear, clearred, clear, clear, clearbrown, clearwhite, clear, clear, clearpurple


[Virtual Fluid A] Required header line.

Fluid= Virtual Fluid A The name of the fluid.




Color=Red The color of the fluid.


[Virtual Fluid B] Required header line.

Fluid= Virtual Fluid B The name of the fluid.




Color=purple The color of the fluid.


[Virtual Fluid C] Required header line.

Fluid= Virtual Fluid C The name of the fluid.




Color=Dark Yellow The color of the fluid.


[Virtual Fluid D] Required header line.

Fluid= Virtual Fluid D The name of the fluid.




Color=Black The color of the fluid.


A-89

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the density laboratory is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by title.


the laboratory, the selected experiment will be automatically set up and running. Preset

experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the instructor so the density simulation can be

adapted to the level of the class or the individual teaching style of the instructor. Several






PhysicsD directory. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the











is an example of a preset experiment for a simple density experiment to show how the variables

can be used.


INI Variables Description [Title] Title=Test Preset Sets the title of the experiment as shown on the clipboard. Not used for preset

electronic assignments. [Cylinder1] BallType=Real, virtual (Default = no ball) Defines whether the ball in cylinder 1 will be Real or Virtual - this is a required

item for the ball to be used. BallKnown=no, yes (Default = yes) Sets whether the student will know what the ball is. BallRadius=.01 (Default=random size will be created)

Defines the radius of the ball in cylinder 1. It must be within the set max/min values for ball radius.

BallName=Aluminum Defines the name of the ball and will be shown if the ball is known, but even if the ball is unknown this is a required item. If the ball is Real, the name must match an already exiting ball in the solids.ini file. If the ball is Virtual, the name can be whatever you want

BallDensity=.5 If the ball is virtual the ball density is required. This defines the density of the virtual ball in g/mL.

BallColor=clear This defines the ball color of virtual balls. This value must match a color value in the solids.ini.

Fluid1Type=Virtual, Real (Default = no This is a required field and defines whether or not the fluid is real or virtual.

A-90

fluid) Fluid1Known=yes, no (Default = yes)

Sets whether the student will know what the fluid is.

Fluid1Amount=half, full Defines the amount of fluid 1 in cylinder 1. A random value around full or half will be used.

Fluid1Name=Corn Syrup Defies the name of the fluid that will be shown if the fluid is known. If the fluid is real it must be from the pre-existing fluids.ini file, but if it is virtual it can be whatever you want.

Fliud1Density=1.1 Defines the density for virtual fluids in g/ml. Fluid1Viscosity=.003 (Default = a random value between the min/max will be selected)

Defines the viscosity for virtual fluids.

Fluid1Color=red Defines the color for virtual fluids, and the color must match a value color in the colors.ini file.

Fluid2Type=Virtual, real (Default = no fluid) If fluid 1 if full, or there is no fluid 1 then fluid 2 is ignored. This defines whether fluid 2 will be real or virtual.

Fluid2Known=yes, no Sets whether the student will know what the fluid is. Fluid2Name=Corn Syrup Defines the name of fluid 2 if it is real, real the name must match one from the

fluids.ini file. Fluid2VName=Virtual Fluid If the fluid is virtual this defines the name of the virtual fluid. Fliud2Density=1.1 This defines the density of the virtual fluid in g/ml. Fluid2Viscosity=.003 (Default = a random value between the min/max will be selected)


Fluid2Color=clear Defines the color for virtual fluids, and the color must match a value color in the colors.ini file.

[Cylinder2] Uses all the same variables as outlined under [Cylinder1]. [Cylinder3] Uses all the same variables as outlined under [Cylinder1]. [Cylinder4] Uses all the same variables as outlined under [Cylinder1]. . [Cylinder5] Uses all the same variables as outlined under [Cylinder1]. [Balance] OnOff=on, off (Default=on) Sets whether or not the balance is on or not. tare=0.0 (default = 0.0) Defines value to set the tare value to. Object=ball, beaker (Default = no object) Defines what object is on the balance BallType=Real Defines whether the ball in cylinder 1 will be Real or Virtual - this is a required

item for the ball to be used. BallKnown=no, yes (Default = yes) Sets whether the student will know what the ball is. BallRadius=.01 (Default=random size will be created)

Defines the radius of the ball in cylinder 1. It must be within the set max/min values for ball radius.

BallName=Aluminum Defines the name of the ball and will be shown if the ball is known, but even if the ball is unknown this is a required item. If the ball is Real, the name must match an already exiting ball in the solids.ini file. If the ball is Virtual, the name can be whatever you want

BallDensity=.5 If the ball is virtual the ball density is required. This defines the density of the virtual ball in g/mL.

BallColor=clear This defines the ball color of virtual balls. This value must match a color value in the solids.ini.

[Beaker] The position of the beaker is set in the Balance section. If it is not put on the

balance it is put on the table.

A-91

Fluid1Type=Virtual, Real (Default = no fluid)

This is a required field and defines whether or not the fluid is real or virtual.

Fluid1Known=yes, no (Default = yes)

Sets whether the student will know what the fluid is.

Fluid1Amount=half, full Defines the amount of fluid 1 in the beaker. A random value around full or half will be used.

Fluid1Name=Corn Syrup Defies the name of the fluid that will be shown if the fluid is known. If the fluid is real it must be from the pre-existing fluids.ini file, but if it is virtual it can be whatever you want.

Fliud1Density=1.1 Defines the density for virtual fluids in g/ml. Fluid1Viscosity=.003 (Default = a random value between the min/max will be selected)


Fluid1Color=red Defines the color for virtual fluids, and the color must match a value color in the colors.ini file.

Fluid2Type=Virtual, real (Default = no fluid) If fluid 1 if full, or there is no fluid 1 then fluid 2 is ignored. This defines whether fluid 2 will be real or virtual.

Fluid2Known=yes, no Sets whether the student will know what the fluid is. Fluid2Name=Corn Syrup Defines the name of fluid 2 if it is real, real the name must match one from the

fluids.ini file. Fluid2VName=Virtual Fluid If the fluid is virtual this defines the name of the virtual fluid. Fliud2Density=1.1 This defines the density of the virtual fluid in g/ml. Fluid2Viscosity=.003 (Default = a random value between the min/max will be selected)


Fluid2Color=clear Defines the color for virtual fluids, and the color must match a value color in the colors.ini file.

An Example Density Preset Experiment

INI Variables Description [Title] Title=Ice in Alcohol or Water Defines the title of the experiment as shown on the clipboard. Not used for

preset assignments. [Cylinder1] BallType=Real Defines the ball type as a real ball. BallKnown=yes Allows the student to see the type of ball. BallName=Ice Defines which real ball from the solid.ini file is used. Fluid1Type=Real Defines the fluid as a real fluid. Fluid1Known=yes Allows the student to see the type of fluid. Fluid1Amount=full The cylinder will be full to a random value near full. Fluid1Name=Alcohol Defines which real fluid from the fluid.ini file is used. [Cylinder2] BallType=Real Defines the ball type as a real ball. BallKnown=yes Allows the student to see the type of ball. BallName=Ice Defines which real ball from the solid.ini file is used. Fluid1Type=Real Defines the fluid as a real fluid. Fluid1Known=yes Allows the student to see the type of fluid. Fluid1Amount=full The cylinder will be full to a random value near full. Fluid1Name=Water Defines which real fluid from the fluid.ini file is used.

A-92

Circuits INI File

The circuits laboratory gives students the ability to build simple or complex circuits using

resistors, capacitors, inductors, and light bulbs and analyze these circuits using a Digital

Multimeter (DMM) or oscilloscope. A significant fraction of the simulation is controlled by the

Circuits.ini file where initial values for components are specified, variables affecting the Laplace

transformation are defined, as well as many other variables. There is also an additional set of INI

files and these define the preset experiments located on the clipboard and used in the circuits

assignments. Described in each of the following sections are the INI variables contained in each

of these INI files. The purpose for providing this information is to grant instructors the ability to

change or adjust the circuits simulation to suit their own needs.

Circuits.ini INI Variables Description [General] AccelerationValues=0.001, 0.005, 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10

These are the allowed acceleration values for displaying data on the oscilloscope.

AccelerationDefault=1 The default acceleration value the program will use. MaxComponents=20 The maximum number of components that can be used in a circuit. ShowErrors=no Solving a circuit using Laplace transforms is complex and occasionally

the algorithm fails. This variable specifies whether these errors should be shown.

[Meters] OscilloscopeRefresh_mSec=50 How often to update data on the oscilloscope. MultiMeterRefresh_RMS_mSec=250 How often to update RMS measurements on the DMM. MultiMeterRefresh_mSec=100 How often to update DC measurements on the DMM. MultiMeterOhmMax=2000000 The maximum resistance before an overload is displayed on the DMM. [RMS] MultiMeter_RMS_SamplesPerPeriod=30 How many data points to use per period to calculate the RMS values. MultiMeter_RMS_MaxPeriods=20 How many periods to use to calculate the RMS values. Power_RMS_SamplesPerPeriod=30 Same for power measurements here and below. Power_RMS_MaxPeriods=20 RMS_Threshold_Hz=3 The lowest frequency before RMS values are no longer calculated. [PowerSources] VoltagePeak=1.0 The initial default voltage amplitude for the function generator. VoltagePeakMax=1000.0 The maximum amplitude that can be selected. VoltagePeakMin=0.1 The minimum amplitude that can be selected. Frequency=60 The initial default frequency. FrequencyMax=1000000 The maximum frequency. FrequencyMin=.001 The minimum frequency. DC_Frequency=10000 DC experiments are really AC calculations. This is a dummy frequency

to use. SquareWaveTerms=10 The powerseries terms to use for a square wave. SawWaveTerms=10 The powerseries terms to use for a saw tooth wave form. [Resistors] Resistance=100 The initial resistance to use for a resistor.

A-93

ResistanceLarge=1000 The initial resistance to use for a large resistor on the breadboard. ResistanceMin=1 The smallest resistance available. ResistanceMax=1000000 The largest resistance available. Tolerance=.0025 The initial tolerance or uncertainty in the assigned value for the

resistance. 0.0025 means 0.25%. BurnOutCheck_mSec=500 How often to check to see if the power has exceeded the power rating. P_BurnOut_Watts=5.0 The default resistor power rating. p_BurnOut_Watts_Min=0.25 The minimum power rating. P_BurnOut_Watts_Max=100 The maximum power rating. BurnOutTime_Sec=5 The time in seconds the power rating must be exceeded before burning

out. [Capacitors] Capacitance=1e-6 The initial capacitance to use for a capacitor. CapacitanceLarge=5e-2 The initial capacitance to use for a large capacitor on the breadboard. CapacitanceMin=1e-10 The smallest capacitance available. CapacitanceMax=10 The largest capacitance available. Tolerance=.0025 The initial tolerance or uncertainty in the assigned value for the

capacitance. 0.0025 means 0.25%. [Inductors] Inductance=1e-3 The initial inductance to use for an inductor. InductanceLarge=1.0 The initial inductance to use for a large inductor on the breadboard. InductanceMin=1e-8 The smallest inductance available. InductanceMax=10 The largest inductance available. Tolerance=.0025 The initial tolerance or uncertainty in the assigned value for the

inductance. 0.0025 means 0.25%. [Wires] ResistanceMin=.000001 The minimum randomly assigned resistance for a wire. ResistanceMax=.0001 The maximum randomly assigned resistance for a wire. [Bulbs] Watts=60 The initial wattage to use for a light bulb. WattsMin=10 The smallest wattage light bulb available. WattsMax=100 The largest wattage light bulb available. IlluminationCheck_mSec=100 How often to check for a change in illumination of the light bulb. BurnOutPowerPercentage=1.1 How far to exceed the specified wattage before the light bulb burns. MaxBrightnessWatts=110 The wattage for the brightest light bulb graphic. Voltage=84.78 The RMS voltage to convert the selected wattage into resistance. BurnOutTime_Sec=5 The time in seconds the power rating must be exceeded before burning

out. Brightness_Exponential=.75 The brightness exponential to make the illumination curve non-linear. [Misc] MultiplicityTolerance=.001 When the percent difference between two roots is smaller than this

value, then the roots are considered to have the same multiplicity.

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the circuits laboratory is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by title.



experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the instructor so the circuits simulation can be


A-94


how these preset files can be created.




PhysicsC directory. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the


Unlike the other simulations, creating preset experiments is relatively easy in the circuits

simulation. Instead of creating the preset files by hand, all that is needed is to create or setup the

experiment in the circuit laboratory and then save the experiment as a preset. A preset is saved

by right-clicking with the mouse on a hidden button located in the extreme upper left-hand

corner of the laboratory. These preset files can be modified by hand if needed and component

values can be changed to unknown as well. Once a preset file has been saved, the preset

language is largely self-explanatory.

Optics INI File

The optics laboratory gives students the ability explore and understand the concepts of lenses,

mirrors, prisms, and color inside an easy to use virtual laboratory. A significant fraction of the

simulation is controlled by the Optics.ini file where initial values for components are specified,

variables affecting the simulation are defined, as well as other variables. There is also an

additional set of INI files and these define the preset experiments located on the clipboard and

used in the optics assignments. Described in each of the following sections are the INI variables


instructors the ability to change or adjust the optics simulation to suit their own needs.

Optics.ini INI Variables Description [General] MirrorLensHeight_cm=7.62 The lens height. HoleSpacing_cm=5.08 The spacing between holes on the optics table (set at 2 inches). MaxTheta = 1.0 The maximum angle in radians a lens or mirror can “see” the light x2. MaxMirrorLensCount=15 The maximum number of mirrors or lenses that can be on the table. MaxBounceCount=50 The maximum number of bounces off the mirrors. ImageLines=on This turns the sight lines for the eye and objects on or off. [Laser] Wavelength=632 This sets the initial wavelength for the laser. (in nm) WaveLengthMin=400 This sets the minimum wavelength for the laser. WaveLengthMax=700 This sets the maximum wavelength for the laser. [Light] Light_Red=250 This sets the initial RGB values for the light bulb. A setting of 255 for

each color will make the line transparent. Light_Green=250 Light_Bue=250

A-95

[Mirror] Radius=71 Sets the initial radius of curvature for the mirror. Anything over the

maximum assumes a flat mirror. (in cm) RadiusMin=4 Sets the minimum radius for the mirror. RadiusMax=70 This sets the maximum radius for the mirror. [Lens] Radius1=20 Sets the initial radius of curvature for the lens for side 1. Anything over

the maximum assumes a flat lens. (in cm). Radius1Min=4 Sets the minimum radius for the lens. Radius1Max=70 Sets the maximum radius for the lens. Radius2=-20 Sets the radius of curvature for side 2 of the lens. The negative sign

makes it convex compared to side 1. IndexRefraction=1.5 Sets the index of refraction for the lens material. IndexRefractionMin=0.1 Sets the minimum index of refraction. IndexRefractionmax=10 Sets the maximum index of refraction. DoubleThickness=0 Sets the initial thickness of the lens at the outside edge between face 1

and face2. DoubleThicknessMin=0.0 Sets the minimum thickness of the lens (in cm). DoublethicknessMax=1.0 Sets the maximum thickness of the lens (in cm). [Eye] AngleIncrement=5 The angle increment when rotating the eye in degrees. LaserBeamRadius=20 The radius of the laser beam when hitting the eye in pixels. LaserBeamTransparency=100 The transparency of the laser beam on the eye. Height=7.62 The size of the eye aperture in cm. BlurFudge=0.25 The degree of blurring for a maximally blurred image (0 to 1). BallNormalFactor=.5 The size of the nominal ball graphic relative to its base size (0 to 1). CandleNormalFactor=.5 The size of the nominal candle graphic relative to its base size (0 to 1). GnomeNormalFactor=.5 The size of the nominal gnome graphic relative to its base size (0 to 1). LaserNormalFactor=.5 The size of the nominal laser graphic relative to its base size (0 to 1). LightNormalFactor=.5 The size of the nominal light graphic relative to its base size (0 to 1). MaxTheta=0.5236 The widest angle (in radians) before an image will not enter the eye. [Filter] Red=0 Sets the red filter to be on or off (1=on, 0=off). Green=0 Sets the green filter to be on or off (1=on, 0=off). Blue=0 Sets the blue filter to be on or off (1=on, 0=off). [Beach Ball] Height=17.0 Sets the height of the beach ball in cm. [Gnome] Height = 7.62 Sets the height of the gnome in cm. [Candle] Height = 5.08 Sets the height of the candle in cm. [Slits] Increment_cm=.1 Sets the distance the slit curtain will move for each click of an arrow.

A-96

Preset Experiments Located on the clipboard in the optics laboratory is a set of 15 preset experiments listed by title.



experiments are intended to provide flexibility for the instructor so the optics simulation can be







PhysicsO directory. Note that in client installations, any modified preset experiments for the


Unlike the other simulations, creating preset experiments is relatively easy in the optics

simulation. Instead of creating the preset files by hand, all that is needed is to create or setup the

experiment in the optics laboratory and then save the experiment as a preset. A preset is saved by

right-clicking with the mouse on a hidden button located in the extreme upper left-hand corner of

the laboratory. These preset files can be modified by hand if needed, and once a preset file has

been saved, the preset language is largely self-explanatory.

B-1

Appendix B

List of Organic Synthesis Assignments

A list of products that can be assigned for organic synthesis experiments for each named reaction.

Esterification

1.

Methyl acetate

2.

Ethyl acetate

3.

3-Methylbutyl acetate

4.

Methyl butanoate

5.

Ethyl butanoate

6.

3-Methylbutyl butanoate

7.

Methyl phenylacetate

8.

Ethyl-2-phenyl acetate

9.

3-Methylbutyl

phenylacetate

10.

Butanol

11.

2-Phenyl ethanol

12.

4-Nitrobenzeneacetic acid

13.


14.

2,4-Dinitrophenylacetic

acid

15.

Formic acid

16.

3-Methyl butanoic acid

17.

Ethanal

18.

3-Methyl butanal

19.

1-Chloro-3-methylbutane

20.


21.

Diisopentyl ether

22.

Benzoic acid

23.

Bromo-phenyl-acetic acid

Alcohol Halogenation

1.

Chlorocyclohexane

B-2

2.

Chlorophenylmethane

3.

2-Chloro-2-methyl

propane

4.


5.


6.


7.

3-Methyl butanal

8.

Benzoic acid

9.

Benzaldehyde

10.

Cyclohexanone

11.

Cyclohexene

12.

Diisopentyl ether

13.

Dibenzyl Ether

14.

1,1-Oxybis-cyclohexane

15.

Di-tert-butyl ether

16.

Benzyl ethyl ether

Alkyl Halide Solvolysis

1.

Benzyl alcohol

2.

2-Methyl-2-propanol

3.

exo-Bicyclo[2.2.1]

heptane-2-ol

4.

Tetrahydrofuran

5.

1,4-Butanediol

6.

1-Chloromethyl-4-nitro-

benzene

7.


benzene

8.

1-Chloromethyl-2,4-

dinitro-benzene

9.

4-Nitro-benzyl alcohol

10.


11.

Benzyl ethyl ether

12.

Benzyl methyl ether

13.

2-methyl-2-ethoxy-

propane

B-3

14.

1-Methoxy butane

15.

5-Ethoxybicyclo[2.2.1]

heptane

16.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene

17.

Benzoic acid

18.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]

heptan-2-one

19.

4-Chloro-butanoic acid

20.

4-Chloro-butyraldehyde

21.

1,4-Dichlorobutane

22.

Butanol

23.

2-Benzyl-benzyl chloride

24.

4-Benzyl-benzyl chloride

25.

Benzyldiisopropylamine

26.

Butyldiisopropylamine

Alkene Hydration

1.

2-Hexanol

2.

1-Phenylethanol

3.

1-Methyl-cyclohexanol

4.

2,3-Dimethyl-2-butanol

5.

1-Hexanol

6.


7.

2-Phenyl ethanol

8.

trans-2-methyl-

cyclohexanol

9.

Hexane-1,2-diol

10.

3,3-Dimethyl-1,2-butane

diol

11.

1-Phenyl-ethane-1,2-diol

12.

cis-1-Methyl-

cyclohexane-1,2-diol

13.

Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

14.

2-Ethoxy-2,3-dimethyl-

butane

15.

Ethyl-(1-phenyl-ethyl)-

ether

B-4

16.

1-Ethoxy-1-methyl-

cyclohexane

17.

2-Chloro-hexane

18.

2-chloro-2,3-dimethyl

butane

19.

1-Chloro-1-phenylethane

20.

1-Chloro-1-methyl-

cyclohexane

21.

1,2-Dibromo-hexane

22.

1,2-Dibromo-3,3-

dimethyl-butane

23.

(1,2-Dibromoethyl)-

benzene

24.

1,2-Dibromo-1-methyl-

cyclohexane

25.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

26.

1-Bromo-3,3-dimethyl-2-

butanol

27.

2-Bromo-1-phenyl-

ethanol

28.

2-Bromo-2-methyl-

cyclohexanol

29.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-

hexane

30.

Ethyl-(2-bromo-1-phenyl-

ethyl)-ether

31.

Pentanoic acid

32.

2,2-Dimethylpropanoic

acid

33.

Benzoic acid

34.

6-Oxo-heptanoic acid

35.

Formic acid

36.

1,2-Epoxyhexane

37.

3,3-Dimethyl-1,2-epoxy

butane

38.

1,2-Epoxyethylbenzene

39.

1-Methyl-1,2-

epoxycyclohexane

40.

4-Nitro-styrene

41.

2-Nitro-styrene

42.

1,3-Diphenyl-1-butene

Hydroboration

1.

2-Methyl-1-butanol

B-5

2.

2-Methyl-3-pentanol

3.

4-Methyl-2-pentanol

4.

1-Hexanol

5.

trans-2-methyl-

cyclohexanol

6.

2-Methyl-2-butanol

7.

2-Methyl-2-pentanol

8.

2-Hexanol

9.

1-Methyl-cyclohexanol

10.

2-Ethoxy-2-methylbutane

11.

3-Ethoxy-2-methyl-

pentane

12.

Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

13.

1-Ethoxy-1-methyl-

cyclohexane

14.

2-Methyl-2-chlorobutane

15.

2-Chloro-2-

methylpentane

16.

2-Chloro-hexane

17.

1-Chloro-1-methyl-

cyclohexane

18.


butane

19.


pentane

20.

1,2-Dibromo-hexane

21.

trans-1,2-Dibromo-1-

methyl-cyclohexane

22.

1-Bromo-2-methyl-

butan-2-ol

23.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

24.

trans-2-Bromo-2-methyl-

cyclohexanol

25.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-2-

methyl-butane

26.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-

hexane

27.

2-Methyl-butane-1,2-diol

28.

syn-4-Methyl-pentane-

2,3-diol

29.

Hexane-1,2-diol

B-6

30.

cis-1-Methyl-

cyclohexane-1,2-diol

31.

1,2-Epoxy-2-methyl-

butane

32.

2,3-Epoxy-4-methyl-

pentane

33.

1,2-Epoxyhexane

34.

1-Methyl-1,2-

epoxycyclohexane

35.

2-Butanone

36.

2-Methyl-propionic acid

37.

Acetic acid

38.

Pentanoic acid

39.

6-Oxo-heptanoic acid

40.

Formic acid

41.

2-Methyl-2-pentene

Alkene Bromination

1.

1,2-Dibromo-hexane

2.

3,4-Dibromo-1-butene

3.


4.

trans-2,3-Dibromo-butane

5.

(1R)-trans-1,2-Dibromo-

cyclohexane

6.

2-Hexanol

7.

3-Buten-1-ol

8.

2-Butanol

9.

1-Cyclohexanol

10.

1-Hexanol

11.

Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

12.

3-Ethoxy-1-butene

13.

1-Ethoxy-2-butene

14.

2-Ethoxy-butane

15.

Ethoxy-cyclohexane

16.

2-Chloro-hexane

B-7

17.

3-Chloro-1-butene

18.

1-Chloro-2-butene

19.

2-Chloro-butane

20.

Chlorocyclohexane

21.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

22.

anti-3-Bromo-butan-2-ol

23.

trans-2-Bromo-

cyclohexanol

24.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-

hexane

25.

4-Bromo-3-ethoxy-but-1-

ene

26.

anti-2-Bromo-3-ethoxy-

butane

27.

trans-1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-

cyclohexane

28.

Hexane-1,2-diol

29.

But-3-ene-1,2-diol

30.

syn-Butane-2,3-diol

31.

cis-Cyclohexane-1,2-diol

32.

1,2-Epoxyhexane

33.

3,4-Epoxy-but-1-ene

34.

2,3-Epoxy-butane

35.

1,2-Epoxy-cyclohexane

36.

Pentanoic acid

37.

2-Propenoic acid

38.

Acetic acid

39.

Hexanedioic acid

40.

Formic acid

Alkene Dihydroxylation

1.


2.

Hexane-1,2-diol

3.

cis-Octahydro-

naphthalene-4a,8a-diol

4.


B-8

5.

2-Methyl-2-butanol

6.

2-Hexanol

7.

Bicyclo[4.4.0]decane-1-ol

8.

1-Cyclohexanol

9.

2-Methyl-1-butanol

10.

1-Hexanol

11.

2-Ethoxy-2-methylbutane

12.

Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

13.

trans-9-Ethoxydecalin

14.

Ethoxy-cyclohexane

15.

2-Methyl-2-chlorobutane

16.

2-Chloro-hexane

17.

4a-Chloro-decahydro-

naphthalene

18.

Chlorocyclohexane

19.


butane

20.

1,2-Dibromo-hexane

21.

4a,8a-Dibromo-

decahydro-naphthalene

22.


cyclohexane

23.

1-Bromo-2-methyl-

butan-2-ol

24.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

25.

9-Bromo-10-hydroxy-

trans-decalin

26.

trans-2-Bromo-

cyclohexanol

27.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-2-

methyl-butane

28.

1-Bromo-2-ethoxy-

hexane

29.


cyclohexane

30.

1,2-Epoxy-2-methyl-

butane

31.

1,2-Epoxyhexane

32.

4a,8a-Epoxy-decahydro-

napthalene

B-9

33.


34.

2-Butanone

35.

Pentanoic acid

36.

Hexanedioic acid

37.

Cyclodecane-1,6-dione

38.

Formic acid

Epoxidation

1.

2,3-Epoxy-butane

2.


3.

1,2-Dimethyl-1,2-epoxy-

cyclohex-4-ene

4.

2,3-Epoxy-cyclohexanol

5.

2-Butanol

6.

1-Cyclohexanol

7.

3,4-Dimethyl-cyclohex-3-

enol

8.

2-Ethoxy-butane

9.

Ethoxy-cyclohexane

10.

3-Ethoxy-cyclohexene

11.

2-Chloro-butane

12.

Chlorocyclohexane

13.

4-Chloro-1,2-dimethyl-

cyclohexene

14.

3-Chloro-cyclohexene

15.

trans-2,3-Dibromo-butane

16.


cyclohexane

17.

4,5-Dibromo-4,5-

dimethyl-cyclohexene

18.

2,3-Dibromo-

cyclohexanol

19.

anti-3-Bromo-butan-2-ol

20.

trans-2-Bromo-

cyclohexanol

21.

2-Bromo-cyclohexane-

1,3-diol

22.

3-Bromo-cyclohexane-

1,2-diol

B-10

23.

anti-2-Bromo-3-ethoxy-

butane

24.


cyclohexane

25.

syn-Butane-2,3-diol

26.


27.

cis-4,5-Dimethyl-

cyclohex-4-ene-1,2-diol

28.

Cyclohexane-1,2,3-triol

29.

Acetic acid

30.

Hexanedioic acid

31.

Oct-4-ene-2,7-dione

32.

2-Cyclohexen-1-one

33.

Cyclohexa-1,3-diene

Diels Alder

1.

Cyclohex-3-enecarboxylic

acid methyl ester

2.

Cyclohexa-1,4-diene-1,2-

dicarboxylic acid

dimethyl ester

3.

4a,5,8,8a-Tetrahydro-

[1,4]naphthoquinone

4.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-ene-

2-carboxylic acid methyl

ester

5.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2,5-

diene-2,3-dicarboxylic

acid dimethyl ester

6.

1,4,4a,8a-Tetrahydro-1,4-

methano-naphthalene-5,8-

dione

7.

4-Oxo-cyclohex-2-ene

carboxylic acid methyl

ester

8.

4-Hydroxy-phthalic acid

dimethyl ester

9.

Naphthalene-1,4,6-triol

10.

3a,4,7,7a-Tetrahydro-4,7-

methano-indene

11.

5-Vinylbicyclo[2.2.1]

hept-2-ene

12.

Bicyclo[4.3.0]nona-3,7-

diene

13.


acid ethyl ester

14.

Cyclohexa-1,4-diene-1,2-

dicarboxylic acid diethyl

ester

15.

Cyclohex-1,4-diene-1,2-

dicarboxylic acid

16.


acid

17.

2,3-Epoxy-2,3,4a,5,8,8a-

hexahydro-[1,4]

naphthoquinone

B-11

18.

5,6-Epoxy-3a,4,5,6,7,7a-

hexahydro-4,7-methano-

indene

19.

1,2-Epoxy-1,2,3a,4,7,7a-

hexahydro-4,7-methano-

indene

20.

2-Bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-

en-2-yl-oxirane

21.

6-vinyl-3-oxa-tricyclo

[3.2.1.02,4]octane

22.

2,2a,3,5a,6,6a-hexahydro-

1aH-1-oxa-cyclopropa

[f]indene

23.

7-Oxa-bicyclo[4.1.0]hept-

3-ene-3,4-dicarboxylic

acid dimethyl ester

24.



ester

25.

1,2,3,4,4a,8a-hexahydro-

1,4-methano-2,3-epoxy-

naphthalene-5,8-dione

26.

3-Oxa-tricyclo[3.2.1.02,4]

oct-6-ene-6,7-dicarboxylic

acid dimethyl ester

27.

3-Oxa-tricyclo[3.2.1.02,4]

octane-6-carboxylic acid

methyl ester

28.

3-Buten-1-ol

29.

2-Cyclopenten-1-ol

30.

3-Ethoxy-1-butene

31.

1-Ethoxy-2-butene

32.

Cyclopent-2-enyl ethyl

ether

33.

3-Chloro-1-butene

34.

1-Chloro-2-butene

35.

3-Chloro-cyclopentene

36.


37.


38.

trans-3,4-Dibrom-

cyclopentene

39.

3,5-Dibromo-

cyclopentene

40.

2,3-Dibromo-propanoic

acid methyl ester

41.

trans-5-Bromo-cyclopent-

2-enol

42.

3-Bromo-2-hydroxy-

propionic acid methyl

ester

43.

4-Bromo-3-ethoxy-

but-1-ene

44.

Buta-3-ene-1,2-diol

45.

cis-Cyclopent-3-ene-

1,2-diol

B-12

46.

2,3-Dihydroxy-propionic

acid methyl ester

47.

3,4-Epoxy-but-1-ene

48.

3,4-Epoxy-cyclopentene

49.

Oxirane-2-carboxylic acid

methyl ester

50.

2-Propenoic acid

51.

Pent-2-ene-1,5-dioic acid

52.

Formic acid

53.

4-Methoxy-but-3-en-2-

one

54.

Methoxy-trimethyl-silane

55.

Trimethylsilanol

56.

Ethoxy-trimethyl-silane

57.

4-Hydroxy-but-3-en-2-one

58.

4-Ethoxy-but-3-en-2-one

59.

1-Hydroxy-4-methoxy-

but-3-en-2-one

60.

Hydroquinone

61.

But-2-ynedioic acid

62.

But-2-ynedioic acid

diethyl ester

63.

2-Propenoic acid, ethyl

ester

Aldol

1.

3-Hydroxybutanal

2.

2-Ethyl-3-hydroxy-

hexanal

3.

3-Hydroxy-3-phenyl-

propanal

4.

2-Ethyl-hex-2-enal

5.

5-Hydroxy-2,2,4-

trimethyl-hexan-3-one

6.

3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-3-

phenyl-propionic acid

2,6-dimethyl-phenyl ester

7.

1-hydroxy-2,4,4-

trimethyl-1-phenyl-

pentan-3-one

8.

5-Hydroxy-2,2,4-

trimethyl-octan-3-one

9.

anti-3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-

3-phenyl-propionic acid

ethyl ester

B-13

10.


phenyl-propionic acid

methyl ester

11.

anti-3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-

3-phenyl-propionic acid

12.

anti-3-hydroxy-2-methyl-

hexanoic acid-2,6-

dimethyl-phenyl ester

13.

But-2-enal

14.

3-Phenyl-propenal

15.

2,2,4-Trimethyl-hex-4-en-

3-one

16.

2,4,4-Trimethyl-1-phenyl-

pent-1-en-3-one

17.

2-Methyl-3-phenyl-

acrylic acid ethyl ester

18.

2-Methyl-3-phenyl-

acrylic acid methyl ester

19.

2-Methyl-3-oxo-pentanoic

acid methyl ester

20.

2-Methyl-3-phenyl-

acrylic acid

21.

Formic acid methyl ester

22.

Formic acid propyl ester

23.

Formic acid phenyl ester

24.

Propanoic acid, 1,1-

dimethylethyl ester

25.

1,1-Diethoxy-ethane

26.

1,1-Diethoxy-butane

27.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

28.

Ethanol

29.

Butanol

30.

Benzyl alcohol

31.

2,2-Dimethyl-pentan-3-ol

32.

Acetic acid

33.

Butanoic acid

34.

Benzoic acid

35.

Bromo-acetaldehyde

36.

2-Bromo-butanal

37.

4-Bromo-2,2-dimethyl-

pentan-3-one

B-14

38.

Propionic acid-2,6-

dimethyl-4-bromo-phenyl

ester

39.

2-Bromo-propionic acid

2,6-dimethyl-phenyl ester

40.

3-Nitro-benzaldehyde

41.

Propionic acid-2,6-

dimethyl-4-nitro-phenyl

ester

42.

3-Hydroxy-3-(4-nitro-

phenyl)-propanal

43.

3-(4-Nitro-phenyl)-

propenal

44.

Propionic acid

45.

2,6-Dimethyl-phenol

46.

Propionic acid ethyl ester

Grignard Addition

1.

2-Methyl-2-butanol

2.

2-cyclohexyl-propan-2-ol

3.

2-Phenyl-2-propanol

4.

1-Phenyl-1-propanol

5.

Diphenyl-methanol

6.

Cyclohexyl-phenyl-

methanol

7.

Propionic acid

8.

Benzoic acid

9.

Cyclohexane

carboxylic acid

10.

Ethanol

11.

Propan-2-ol

12.

Benzyl alcohol

13.

1-Cyclohexanol

14.

Phenol

15.

2,2-Diethoxy-propane

16.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

17.

Ethyl bromide

18.

Bromobenzene

19.

Bromocyclohexane

B-15

20.

1-Bromo-propan-2-one

21.

nitro-Benzene

22.

1,3-Dinitrobenzene

23.


24.


25.

4-Methyl-pent-3-en-2-one

26.

4-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-

butan-2-one

27.

4-Phenyl-but-3-en-2-one

28.

Methyl acetate

Benzene Nitration

1.

1-Methyl-4-nitro-benzene

2.


3.

1-Methyl-2,4-dinitro-

benzene

4.


5.

Bromomethyl-benzene

6.

Benzoic acid

7.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

8.

Benzyl alcohol

9.


Friedel-Crafts

1.

3-Isopropyl-benzaldehyde

2.

3-Benzoyl-benzaldehyde

3.

3-Acetyl-benzaldehyde

4.

1-isopropyl-2-methyl-

benzene

5.

1-Isopropyl-4-methyl-

benzene

6.

4-Acetyltoluene

7.

2-Acetyltoluene

8.

2-Methyl-benzophenone

9.


10.

Ethyl acetate

B-16

11.

Methyl acetate

12.

Benzoic acid ethyl ester

13.

Benzoic acid methyl ester

14.

Bromoacetic acid ethyl

ester

15.

Acetic acid

16.

Benzoic acid

17.

Bromoacetic acid

18.


19.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

20.

Propan-2-ol

21.

Benzyl alcohol

22.

N,N-Diisopropyl-

acetamide

23.

N,N-Diisopropyl-

benzamide

24.


25.


26.

1-Methyl-2,4-dinitro-

benzene

27.


28.

3-Nitro-benzoic acid

29.

Bromomethyl-benzene

30.


31.

2-Ethoxy-propane

32.

2-Propanone

Acid Chloride

1.

Acetyl chloride

2.

Benzoyl chloride

3.

Heptanoyl chloride

4.

Ethyl acetate

5.


6.

Ethyl heptanoate

B-17

7.

Ethanol

8.

Benzyl alcohol

9.

1-Heptanol

10.


Carbonyl Reduction

1.

Benzyl alcohol

2.

1-Cyclohexanol

3.

3-Hydroxy-butyric acid

methyl ester

4.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

5.

1,1-Diethoxy-

cyclohexane

6.

2-Bromo-cyclohexanone

7.

2-Bromo-3-oxo-butyric

acid methyl ester

8.

Benzoic acid

9.


10.

Oxepan-2-one

11.

3-Oxo-butyric acid

12.

3-Oxo-butyric acid ethyl

ester

13.


14.

Bicyclohexyliden-2-one

15.

2-(Hydroxy-phenyl-

methyl)-cyclohexanone

16.

2-Benzylidene-

cyclohexanone

17.

2-Acetyl-3-phenyl-acrylic

acid

18.

4-Phenyl-but-3-en-2-one

19.


acid methyl ester

20.


acid ethyl ester

21.

2-Cyclohexylidene-

acetoacetic acid

22.

1-Cyclohexylidene-

propan-2-one

23.

2-Cyclohexylidene-3-oxo-

butyric acid methyl ester

24.

2-Cyclohexylidene-3-oxo-

butyric acid ethyl ester

B-18

Claisen Condensation

1.

2-Oxo-cyclohexane


ester

2.

3-Oxo-butyric acid

methyl ester

3.

3-Oxo-pentanoic acid

methyl ester

4.

2-Methyl-3-oxo-butyric

acid methyl ester

5.


acid methyl ester

6.


ester

7.


acid ethyl ester

8.

2-Oxo-cyclohexane

carboxylic acid ethyl ester

9.

3-Oxo-pentanoic acid

ethyl ester

10.

2-Methyl-3-oxo-butyric

acid ethyl ester

11.

Ethyl acetate

12.

Ethyl propionate

13.

Heptanedioic acid diethyl

ester

14.

Acetic acid

15.

Propionic acid

16.

Heptanedioic acid

17.

Bromo-acetic acid methyl

ester

18.

2-Bromo-propanoic acid

methyl ester

19.

2-Bromo-heptanedioic

acid dimethyl ester

Alcohol Oxidation

1.

Benzoic acid

2.

Benzaldehyde

3.

Acetophenone

4.

3-Methyl-cyclohex-2-

enone

5.

Chlorophenylmethane

6.

1-Chloro-1-phenylethane

7.

3-Chloro-1-methyl-

cyclohexene

8.

Dibenzyl Ether

9.

Benzyl ethyl ether

B-19

10.

bis-(1-Phenyl-ethyl)-ether

11.

Ethyl-(1-phenyl-ethyl)-

ether

12.

Benzyl-(1-phenyl-ethyl)-

ether

13.

1-Methyl-cyclohexane-

1,2,3-triol

14.

2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-

hexanedioic acid

15.

1-Methyl-2,3-

epoxycyclohexanol

C-1

Appendix C

List of Organic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns

A list of organic qualitative analysis unknowns that can be assigned arranged by unknown class.

Alkenes

1.

1-Hexene

2.

1-Methyl-cyclohexene

3.

4-Methyl-2-pentene

4.

2-Methyl-1-butene

5.

Styrene

6.

2-Methyl-2-pentene

7.

1,3-Diphenyl-1-butene

8.

Benzene

9.

1-isopropyl-2-methyl-

benzene

10.

1-Isopropyl-4-methyl-

benzene

11.

Indene

12.

Cyclohexene

13.

1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8-Octahydro-

naphthalene

14.

4,5-Dimethyl-cyclohexene

15.

Cyclohexa-1,3-diene

16.

Cyclopenta-1,3-diene

17.

4-Vinyl-cyclohexene

18.

1,2-Dimethyl-cyclohexa-

1,4-diene

19.

Bicylo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene

20.

4-Nitro-styrene

21.

2-Nitro-styrene

22.

nitro-Benzene

23.

Cyclohex-2-enol

24.

2-Buten-1-ol

25.

cis-Cyclopent-3-ene-1,2-

diol

C-2

26.

cis-4,5-Dimethyl-


27.

But-2-enal

28.

3-Phenyl-propenal

29.

2-Ethyl-hex-2-enal

30.


31.

2,5-Cyclohexadiene-1,4-

dione

32.


enone

33.

2-Propenoic acid, methyl

ester

34.


ester

35.


acid methyl ester

36.

2-Propenoic acid

37.


38.

3-Chloro-1-butene

39.


40.


cyclohex-4-ene

41.

1-Ethoxy-2-butene

42.

N-Allylaniline

43.

Acrylamide

44.

Cinnamamide

45.

1-Bromo-but-3-en-2-ol

46.


ene

Alcohols

1.

Benzyl alcohol

2.

3-Methyl-1-butanol

3.

2-Methyl-2-propanol

4.


5.

Methanol

6.

Ethanol

7.

Butanol

C-3

8.

1-Hexanol

9.

1-Heptanol

10.

2-Methyl-1-butanol

11.

2-Phenyl ethanol

12.

4-tert-Butylbenzyl alcohol

13.

2-Butanol

14.

2-Hexanol

15.

1-Phenylethanol

16.

Diphenyl-methanol

17.

1-Phenyl-1-propanol

18.

Propan-2-ol

19.

2,2-Dimethyl-pentan-3-ol

20.

2-Methyl-3-pentanol

21.

4-Methyl-2-pentanol

22.

1-Cyclohexanol

23.

trans-2-methyl-

cyclohexanol

24.


25.

2-Phenyl-2-propanol

26.

2-Methyl-2-pentanol

27.

2-Methyl-2-butanol

28.

1,4-Butanediol

29.

Hexane-1,2-diol

30.

syn-Butane-2,3-diol

31.

syn-4-Methyl-pentane-2,3-

diol

32.


33.

cis-1-Methyl-cyclohexane-

1,2-diol

34.

Phenol

35.

Benzene-1,3-diol

C-4

36.

Cyclohexane-1,2,3-triol

37.


38.


39.

2,6-Dimethyl-4-nitro-

phenol

40.

Cyclohex-2-enol

41.

2-Buten-1-ol

42.

cis-Cyclopent-3-ene-1,2-

diol

43.

cis-4,5-Dimethyl-


44.

3-Hydroxybutanal

45.

4-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-

butan-2-one

46.

2-Ethyl-3-hydroxy-

butyraldehyde

47.

4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-

pentan-2-one

48.

5-Hydroxy-2,2,4-


49.

2-(Hydroxy-phenyl-

methyl)-butyraldehyde

50.

1-hydroxy-2,4,4-trimethyl-

1-phenyl-pentan-3-one

51.

4-Chloro-1-butanol

52.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

53.


butanol

54.

9-Bromo-10-hydroxy-

trans-decalin

55.

2-Bromo-cyclohexane-1,3-

diol

56.

2,3-Dibromo-cyclohexanol

57.


methyl ester

58.


phenyl-propionic acid 2,6-


59.


60.

3-Bromo-2-hydroxy-

propionic acid methyl ester

Aldehydes

1.

Butyraldehyde

2.

Benzaldehyde

3.

3-Phenyl-propenal

C-5

4.

3-Methyl butanal

5.

3-Isopropyl-benzaldehyde

6.

4-Nitrobenzaldehyde

7.


8.

But-2-enal

9.

2-Ethyl-hex-2-enal

10.


11.

3-Hydroxybutanal

12.

3-Hydroxy-3-phenyl-

propanal

13.

2-Ethyl-3-hydroxy-

butyraldehyde

14.

2-(Hydroxy-phenyl-

methyl)-butyraldehyde

15.

Bromo-acetaldehyde

16.


17.

4-Chloro-benzaldehyde

18.

4-Acetamidobenzaldehyde

Ketones

1.

1-Phenyl-ethanone

2.

Cyclohexanone

3.

2-Propanone

4.

2-Butanone

5.

2,2-Dimethyl-pentan-3-one

6.

4-Acetyltoluene

7.

2-Acetyltoluene

8.


9.

Cyclodecane-1,6-dione

10.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-one

11.


12.

2-Cyclohexen-1-one

C-6

13.


enone

14.

2,5-Cyclohexadiene-1,4-

dione

15.


16.

4-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-

butan-2-one

17.

4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-

pentan-2-one

18.

1-hydroxy-2,4,4-trimethyl-

1-phenyl-pentan-3-one

19.

5-Hydroxy-2,2,4-


20.


21.

3-Oxo-butyric acid

22.

2-Oxo-propionic acid

23.

3-Oxo-butyric acid methyl

ester

24.

2-Oxo-cyclohexane


ester

Acids

1.

Benzoic acid

2.

Heptanoic acid

3.

Formic acid

4.

Acetic acid

5.

Propionic acid

6.

Butanoic acid

7.

Pentanoic acid

8.

2-Methyl-propionic acid

9.


10.

2,2-Dimethylpropanoic

acid

11.

2-Phenylacetic acid

12.

Cyclohexanecarboxylic

acid

13.

Ethane-1,2-dioic acid

14.

Propanedioic acid

15.

Hexanedioic acid

16.

Heptanedioic acid

C-7

17.


18.


19.


20.

2,4-Dinitrophenylacetic

acid

21.

2-Propenoic acid

22.

Bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-ene-

2-carboxylic acid

23.

3-Oxo-butyric acid

24.

2-Oxo-propionic acid

25.

2-Bromo-butanoic acid

26.

m-Chlorobenzoic acid

27.

N-Acetylanthranilic acid

Esters

1.

Ethyl-2-phenyl acetate

2.

3-Methylbutyl acetate

3.

Methyl propionate

4.

Methyl acetate

5.

Ethyl acetate

6.

Propionic acid ethyl ester

7.

Propanoic acid, 1,1-

dimethylethyl ester

8.

Methyl butanoate

9.

Ethyl butanoate

10.

3-Methylbutyl butanoate

11.

Benzoic acid methyl ester

12.


13.

Methyl phenylacetate

14.

3-Methylbutyl

phenylacetate

15.

Ethyl heptanoate

16.

Acetic acid 1-phenyl-ethyl

ester

17.

Formic acid methyl ester

C-8

18.

Formic acid propyl ester

19.


20.

Propionic acid 2,6-


21.

Dihydro-furan-2-one

22.

Oxepan-2-one

23.

1,7-Dimethyl-

heptanedioate

24.

Heptanedioic acid diethyl

ester

25.

3-Nitro-benzoic acid ethyl

ester

26.

Propionic acid-2,6-

dimethyl-4-nitro-phenyl

ester

27.

2-Bromo-heptanedioic acid

dimethyl ester

28.

2-Propenoic acid, methyl

ester

29.


ester

30.


acid methyl ester

31.

But-2-ynedioic acid ethyl

ester methyl ester

32.

3-Oxo-butyric acid methyl

ester

33.


ester

34.

2-Oxo-cyclohexane


ester

35.

Methyl 2-chloropropionate

36.


methyl ester

37.

3-Bromo-2-hydroxy-


38.


phenyl-propionic acid 2,6-


Amines

1.

Benzylamine

2.

Diisopropyl amine

3.

Triethyl amine

4.

Methyl amine

5.

Propyl amine

6.

n-Heptylamine

7.

n-Octylamine

C-9

8.

Isopropylamine

9.

sec-Butylamine

10.

Aniline

11.

Diethylamine

12.

N-Methylpropylamine

13.

N-Ethylisopropylamine

14.

N-Methylaniline

15.

N-Methyldibutylamine

16.

Butyldiisopropylamine

17.

Benzyldiisopropylamine

18.

Triisopropylamine

19.

N,N-Dimethylaniline

20.

Cyclobutylamine

21.

1-Phenylpiperidine

22.

Quinoline

23.

N-Allylaniline

Amides

1.

N,N-Diisopropyl-

acetamide

2.

Acetanilide

3.

Formamide

4.

Butyramide

5.

Cyclohexanecarboxamide

6.

N-Ethylacetamide

7.

2,2-Dimethyl-

propionamide

8.

N,N-Dimethylacetamide

9.

Formanilide

10.

N,N-Diphenylformamide

11.

1-Acetylpiperidine

C-10

12.

Cinnamamide

13.

2-Bromopropionamide

14.

4-Acetamidobenzaldehyde

15.

2-Bromo-N-

phenylpropionamide

16.

N-Acetylanthranilic acid

Halides

1.

Chlorophenylmethane

2.

2-Chloro-2-methyl

propane

3.

Chlorocyclohexane

4.

1-Chloro-3-methyl butane

5.


6.

Chlorobutane

7.

1-tert-Butyl-4-

chloromethyl-benzene

8.

Ethyl bromide

9.

Bromomethyl-benzene

10.

2-Chloro-hexane

11.

2-Chloro-butane

12.


13.

2-Chloro-4-methyl pentane

14.

3-Chloro-2-methyl pentane

15.

exo-2-Chloro-

bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane

16.

Bromocyclohexane

17.

2-Chloro-2-methylpentane

18.

4a-Chloro-decahydro-

naphthalene

19.

1,2-Dibromo-hexane

20.


butane

21.


cyclohexane

22.

4a,8a-Dibromo-decahydro-

naphthalene

23.


benzene

C-11

24.

Benzene Chloride

25.

Bromobenzene

26.

3-Chloro-1-butene

27.


28.

4-Chloro-1-butanol

29.

1-Bromo-2-hexanol

30.


butanol

31.

9-Bromo-10-hydroxy-

trans-decalin

32.

Bromo-acetaldehyde

33.

4-Chloro-benzaldehyde

34.


35.


36.

2-Bromo-butanoic acid

37.

m-Chlorobenzoic acid

38.

Methyl 2-chloropropionate

39.

2-Bromo-heptanedioic acid

dimethyl ester

40.

2-Bromopropionamide

41.

2-Bromo-N-phenyl

propionamide

42.


43.

4-Bromo-3-ethoxy-

but-1-ene

44.

3-Bromo-2-hydroxy-


45.

2-Bromo-cyclohexane-1,3-

diol

46.

2,3-Dibromo-cyclohexanol

Ethers

1.


2.

Diethyl ether

3.

2-Methoxypropane

4.

1-Ethoxy-butane

5.

Di-tert-butyl ether

C-12

6.

Diisopentyl ether

7.

Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

8.

2-Methoxy-2-methyl-

propane

9.

Dibenzyl Ether

10.

Benzyl methyl ether

11.

Ethyl phenyl ether

12.

Benzyl ethyl ether

13.

Tetrahydrofuran

14.

2,3-Epoxy-butane

15.

1,2-Epoxyhexane

16.

1,2-Epoxyethylbenzene

17.

3,3-Dimethyl-1,2-

epoxybutane

18.

1,2-Epoxy-2-methyl-

butane

19.

1-Methyl-1,2-

epoxycyclohexane

20.

4a,8a-Epoxy-decahydro-

napthalene

21.

1,1-Diethoxy-ethane

22.


23.

Benzaldehyde

diethylacetal

24.

1-Ethoxy-2-butene

25.

3,4-Epoxy-but-1-ene

26.


cyclohex-4-ene

27.


ene

Natural Products

1.

Citric Acid

2.

Glycine

3.

Fumaric Acid

4.

Alpha-ketogluteric Acid

5.

Dopamine

6.

D-Glucose

C-13

7.

Sucrose

8.

Vanillin

9.

Capsaicin

10.

Cocaine

11.

Cholesterol

D-1

Appendix D

Quantum Equations

The experiments in the quantum simulation are based on actual experimental measurements, as is

the case for the emission and adsorption experiments or on equations that are derived from

fundamental principles. Given in this section is a description of some of these equations that an

instructor may wish to pass on to the students in the class. It is beyond the scope of this user’s

guide to detail how these equations were derived. Most of the supporting information for these

equations can be found in a good undergraduate physics text. In the case of the Millikan Oil

Drop Experiment, the equations used in the simulation were developed from Millikan’s original

paper.

Photoelectric Effect. In the photoelectric experiment, the kinetic energy of the electron

ejected from a metal due to an incident photon is calculated using the equation, Ekinetic = h ,

where h is Planck’s constant, is the frequency of the photon, and is the work function for the

metal. Values of the work function used for all the available metals are given in the Metal Table

found in the QuantumDB directory. In this experiment, no multiple photon events are allowed to

occur.

Blackbody Radiation. In the quantum simulation, each available metal can be heated up to its

melting point, where it is then allowed to melt. Before the metal melts, each metal is treated as a

perfect blackbody emitter and follows Planck’s blackbody radiation formula. The equation that is

used in the simulation is given in terms of the intensity (not the energy density, which is

normally the case) and is =1

18)(

5 Tkhc BeT

hcNI where I( ) is the intensity of the

radiation as a function of wavelength, ; N is a normalizing factor set to 0.2 to keep the intensity

within the bounds of 0 to 1; and the other variables take on their normal values.

Thompson Experiment. In the Thompson Experiment, the charge-to-mass ratio, q/me, for an

electron can be calculated by measuring the deflection of a beam of electrons on a phosphor

screen caused by an applied electric field and then measuring the magnitude of a perpendicular

magnetic field required to bring the deflected beam back to the center of the phosphor screen.

The setup and geometry of the experiment has an incident beam of electrons with a given kinetic

energy (velocity), which passes through an electric field of strength E and a perpendicular

magnetic field of strength B. Initially, B is set to 0 (zero), and the incident beam is deflected on

the phosphor screen by applying a voltage across the electric plates. The deflection and voltage

must be measured. The deflected beam is then brought back to the zero (or middle) of the

phosphor screen by applying the magnetic field. From these measurements and using values

specified in the INI variables, the charge-to-mass ratio for an electron, q/me, can be calculated.

The derivation of the following equations is straightforward, but involves more detail than is

necessary here. The charge-to-mass ratio, q/me, is calculated using the equation

D-2

22

2

lB

Ez

m

q

e

= , where

q = the charge on the electron in coulombs,

me = the mass of the electron in kg,

E = is the magnitude of the electric field calculated using E = V/d,

V = voltage applied to the electric plates in volts,

d = the spacing between the electric plates in m and is specified as an INI variable in Lab.ini

(default setting = 0.050 m),

z = the deflection of the electron beam as the beam exits the electric and magnetic fields,

B = the applied magnetic field in T, and

l = the length of the electric and magnetic fields. (This is also specified as an INI variable in

Lab.ini. The default setting is 0.050 m.)

The deflection of the electron beam as the beam exits the electric and magnetic field, z, cannot be

measured directly, but must be calculated using the measured deflection on the phosphor screen,

x. The equation that calculates z from x is straightforward to derive and reduces to

lb

xz

21+= , where

z = the deflection of the electron beam as the beam exits the electric and magnetic fields,

x = the deflection of the electron beam as measured at the phosphor screen,

b = the distance from the electric and magnetic field to the phosphor screen and is specified as

an INI variable in Lab.ini (default setting = 0.762 m),

l = the length of the electric and magnetic fields. (This is also specified as an INI variable in

Lab.ini. The default setting is 0.050 m.)

Millikan Oil Drop Experiment. In the Millikan Oil Drop Experiment, the charge of an

electron is measured using the following process: (1) A random number of electrons (between 0

and 5) are deposited on very fine oil mist droplets using an electron gun. (2) The mass of an

individual droplet is calculated by measuring the terminal velocity of the drop. (3) The drop is

then suspended (or stopped from falling) by adjusting the voltage across the electric plates. (4)

From the mass of the drop and the voltage required to suspend the drop, the charge on the drop

can be calculated. The following equations are required for this calculation.

To calculate the radius of the oil droplet from the terminal velocity, the first approximation of the

radius, is

r =9 air vt

2 g ( oil air ),

D-3

which can then be used to calculate a more accurate value using the equation

r =9 air vt

2 g ( oil air)

1

1+ b pr

1/ 2

,

where r on the right side of the equation is the radius acquired from the first approximation and

the new r is used for the second iteration and so on until the answer converges. The variables are

defined as follows:

vt = terminal velocity;

g = 9.81 m s-2

, acceleration due to gravity;

oil = density of oil = 821 kg m-3

(set as an INI variable in Video.ini);

air = density of air = 1.22 kg m-3


air = viscosity of air = 1.4607 10-5

kg m-1

s-1


b = correction for small drop size = 8.1184 10-8

m atm;

p = atmospheric pressure in atm = 1 (set as an INI variable in Video.ini).

From this, the mass of the droplet can be calculated from the equation

oilrm =3

3

4.

If a voltage is applied such that the drop is stationary, then the force due to gravity is balanced by

the force due to the electric field, or

mgqE = .

Rearranging and using E = V/dplates yields

V

gmdCnQ

V

gmdq

platesplates== )(or , where

q = total charge on the drop,

Q(n) = number of electrons on the drop (an integer),

C = the fundamental charge of an electron,

E = electric field = V/dplates,

V = voltage across the plates, and

dplates = the distance between the voltage plates = 0.010 m (set as an INI variable in Video.ini).

To do a more refined calculation of q, or to calculate it for a nonzero velocity for an applied

field, the equation

D-4

q =4 dplates3 V

1

g( oil air )

9 air

2

3

1/ 2

1

1+ b pr

3 / 2

vt v field( ) vt

can be used, where the only new variable not described previously, vfield, is the velocity of the

drop in the applied electric field.

E-1

Appendix E

Answers to Preset Unknowns

Inorganic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns

Unknown Cation Unknown Cation Unknown Cation

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

Na+

K+

Na+, K

+

Water

Water

Na+

K+

Na+, K

+

Pb2+

Hg22+

Ag+

Water

Ag+, Hg2

2+, Pb

2+

Hg22+

, Pb2+

Ag+, Pb

2+

Ag+, Hg2

2+

Water

Ag+, Hg2

2+, Pb

2+

Ag+, Hg2

2+

Ag+, Pb

2+

Hg22+

, Pb2+

Ag+

Pb2+

Hg22+

Co2+

, Cr3+

Co2+

, Cu2+

Cr3+

, Cu2+

Water

Co2+

, Cr3+

, Cu2+

Cr3+

Cu2+

Co2+

Co2+

, Cr3+

, Cu2+

Water

Co2+

Cu2+

Cr3+

Cr3+

, Cu2+

Co2+

, Cr3+

Co2+

, Cu2+

Ba2+

, Sr2+

Ba2+

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

Ba2+

, Ca2+

Sr2+

Ba2+

, Mg2+

Ca2+

Sr2+

, Ca2+

Mg2+

Sr2+

, Mg2+

Water

Ca2+

, Mg2+

Ba2+

, Sr2+

, Ca2+

, Mg2+

Sr2+

, Ca2+

, Mg2+

Ba2+

, Ca2+

, Mg2+

Ba2+

, Sr2+

, Mg2+

Ba2+

, Sr2+

, Ca2+

Co2+

, Cu2+

Co2+

, Ni2+

Cu2+

, Ni2+

Co2+

, Cu2+

, Ni2+

Water

Ni2+

Cu2+

Co2+

Water

Co2+

Cu2+

Ni2+

Co2+

, Cu2+

, Ni2+

Cu2+

, Ni2+

Co2+

, Ni2+

Co2+

, Cu2+

Al3+

, Sb3+

Al3+

, Sn4+

Al3+

, Zn2+

Sb3+

, Sn4+

Sb3+

, Zn2+

Sn4+

, Zn2+

Water

Al3+

, Sb3+

, Sn4+

Al3+

, Sb3+

, Zn2+

Al3+

, Sn4+

, Zn2+

Sb3+

, Sn4+

, Zn2+

Al3+

, Sb3+

, Sn4+

, Zn2+

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

Zn2+

Sb3+

Sn4+

Al3+

Ag+, Mg

2+, Cu

2+

Ag+, Mg

2+, Cr

3+

Ag+, Mg

2+, Co

2+

Ag+, Ca

2+, Cu

2+

Ag+, Ca

2+, Cr

3+

Ag+, Ca

2+, Co

2+

Ag+, Sr

2+, Cu

2+

Ag+, Sr

2+, Cr

3+

Ag+, Sr

2+, Co

2+

Ag+, Ba

2+, Cu

2+

Ag+, Ba

2+, Cr

3+

Ag+, Ba

2+, Co

2+

Hg22+

, Ba2+

, Co2+

Hg22+

, Ba2+

, Cr3+

Hg22+

, Ba2+

, Cu2+

Hg22+

, Sr2+

, Co2+

Hg22+

, Sr2+

, Cr3+

Hg22+

, Sr2+

, Cu2+

Hg22+

, Ca2+

, Co2+

Hg22+

, Ca2+

, Cr3+

Hg22+

, Ca2+

, Cu2+

Hg22+

, Mg2+

, Co2+

Hg22+

, Mg2+

, Cr3+

Hg22+

, Mg2+

, Cu2+

Pb2+

, Mg2+

, Cu2+

Pb2+

, Mg2+

, Cr3+

Pb2+

, Mg2+

, Co2+

Pb2+

, Ca2+

, Cu2+

Pb2+

, Ca2+

, Cr3+

Pb2+

, Ca2+

, Co2+

Pb2+

, Sr2+

, Cu2+

Pb2+

, Sr2+

, Cr3+

Pb2+

, Sr2+

, Co2+

Pb2+

, Ba2+

, Cu2+

Pb2+

, Ba2+

, Cr3+

Pb2+

, Ba2+

, Co2+

E-2

Organic Qualitative Analysis Unknowns

Alkenes

1. 1,4-Dibromo-2-butene

2. 1-Ethoxy-2-butene

3. 2-Buten-1-ol

4. 2-Methyl-2-pentene

5. 3-Chloro-1-butene

6. 4-Methyl-pent-3-en-2-one

7. Ethyl acrylate

8. Methyl acrylate

9. 2-Propenoic acid

10. Acrylamide

11. N-Vinylaniline

12. 2,5-Cyclohexadiene-1,4-dione

13. But-2-enal

14. 3-Phenyl-propenal

15. Cinnamamide

16. Cyclohexene

17. Cyclopenta-1,3-diene

18. 4,5-Dimethyl-cyclohexene

19. 1-Hexene

20. 2-Methyl-1-butene

21. 3-Methyl-cyclohex-2-enone

22. 1-Methyl-cyclohexene


24. nitro-Benzene

25. 2-Nitro-styrene

26. 4-Nitro-styrene

27. Styrene

Acids

28. Benzoic acid

29. Heptanedioic acid

30. Heptanoic acid

31. Cyclohexanecarboxylic acid

32. Acetic acid

33. Hexanedioic acid

34. Butanoic acid

35. 2,2-Dimethylpropanoic acid

36. Formic acid

37. 3-Methyl butanoic acid

38. Propanedioic acid

39. Pentanoic acid

40. 2-Phenylacetic acid

41. Propionic acid

42. 3-Oxo-butyric acid

43. 2-Propenoic acid

44. 2-Oxo-propionic acid

45. 2-Nitrobenzeneacetic acid

46. m-Chlorobenzoic acid

47. 2-Bromo-butanoic acid

48. 3-Nitro-benzoic acid

49. 4-Nitro-benzoic acid

50. 2,4-Dinitrophenylacetic acid

51. 2-Methyl-propionic acid

52. Ethanedioc acid

Alcohols

53. Benzyl alcohol

54. 3-Methyl-1-butanol

55. 2-Methyl-2-propanol

56. 2-Methyl-butane-1,2-diol

57. 1-Butanol

58. 1-Heptanol

59. 1-Hexanol


61. 2-Phenyl ethanol

62. 4-tert-Butylbenzyl alcohol

63. 2-Nitro-benzyl alcohol

64. 4-Nitro-benzyl alcohol

65. 2-Butanol

66. 1-Hexanol

67. 1-Phenylethanol

68. Diphenyl-methanol

69. 1-Phenyl-1-propanol

70. 2,2-Dimethyl-pentan-3-ol

71. 2-Methyl-3-pentanol


73. Cyclohexanol

74. 2,3-Dimethyl-2-butanol

75. 2-Phenyl-2-propanol



78. 2-Chloro-4-methyl pentane


80. Bromobenzene

81. Bromomethyl-benzene

Amides

82. N-Ethylacetamide

83. Formamide

84. Butyramide

85. N,N-Dimethylacetamide

86. Cyclohexanecarboxamide

87. Formanilide

88. 1-Acetylpiperidine

89. N,N-Diphenylformamide

90. 2-Bromopropionamide

91. Cinnamamide

92. Acetanilide

Amines

93. Benzylamine

E-3

94. n-Heptylamine

95. Diisopropyl amine

96. Triethyl amine

97. Methyl amine

98. Propyl amine

99. Aniline

100. sec-Butylamine

101. N-Methylaniline

102. N-Methyldibutylamine

103. N-Methylpropylamine

104. Cyclobutylamine

105. n-Octylamine

106. Triisopropylamine

107. N,N-Dimethylaniline

108. Quinoline

109. Isopropylamine

Esters

110. Ethyl-2-phenyl acetate

111. 3-Methylbutyl acetate

112. Methyl propionate

113. Methyl acrylate

114. 1,7-Dimethyl-heptanedioate

115. Methyl acetylacetate

116. 2-Oxo-cyclohexane carboxylic acid

methyl ester

117. Ethyl heptanoate

118. Ethyl-2-phenyl acetate

119. Propyl formate

120. Ethyl acrylate

121. Methyl 2-chloropropionate

122. 3-Hydroxy-butyric acid methyl ester

123. 2-Bromo-heptanedioic acid dimethyl

ester

124. Cyclohex-3-enecarboxylic acid methyl

ester

125. Ethyl acetoacetate

126. Ethyl butanoate

127. Ethyl benzoate

128. Ethyl 3-nitrobenzoate

129. Methyl formate

130. Phenylformate

131. 3-Methylbutyl butanoate

132. 3-Methylbutyl phenylacetate

133. Methyl butanoate

134. Methyl phenylacetate

135. Heptanedioic acid diethyl ester

136. Propanoic acid, 1,1-dimethylethyl ester

137. Propionic acid 2,6-dimethyl-phenyl

ester

Ethers

138. Diethyl ether

139. Tetrahydrofuran

140. Ethyl phenyl ether

141. Benzyl ethyl ether

142. Ethyl 2-hexyl ether

143. Di-tert-butyl ether


145. 2-Methoxy-2-methyl-propane

146. 1,1-Diethoxy-ethane

147. 2,2-Diethoxy-propane

148. Dibenzyl Ether

149. 1-Ethoxy-butane

150. 2-Methoxypropane

151. Diisopentyl ether

Halides

152. Benzyl chloride

153. 2-Chloro-2-methyl propane

154. Chlorocyclohexane

155. 1-Chloro-3-methyl butane

156. Benzene Chloride

157. 4-Chloro-1-butanol

158. 2-Chloro-norbornane

159. 3-Chloro-cyclohexene

160. 3-Chloro-1-butene

161. 3-Bromo-cyclohexane-1,2-diol

162. 4-Chloro-benzaldehyde

163. 4-Chloro-butyraldehyde

164. Bromo-acetaldehyde

165. 2-Bromo-cyclohexanone


167. 2-Nitrobenzyl chloride

168. 4-tert-Butyl-benzyl chloride

169. 1-Bromo-3,3-dimethyl-2-butanol

170. 1-Bromo-2-hexanol

171. 1,4-Dibromo-2-butene

172. 2-Bromo-butanoic acid

173. Bromocyclohexane

174. Ethyl bromide

175. 1,2-Dibromo-hexane

176. 2-Chloro-butane

177. 2-Chloro-hexane

178. 2-Chloro-3-methylbutane

179. 2-Chloro-2-methylpentane

180. Hexane-1,2-diol

181. syn-Butane-2,3-diol

182. Benzene-1,3-diol

183. 2,6-Dimethyl-4-nitro-phenol

184. Cyclohex-2-enol

185. 2-Buten-1-ol

186. 3-Hydroxybutanal

187. 4-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-butan-2-one

188. 4-Chloro-1-butanol


190. 1-Bromo-but-3-en-2-ol

191. 3-Hydroxy-butyric acid methyl ester

E-4

Ketones

192. Acetophenone

193. Cyclohexanone

194. 2-Propanone

195. 2-Butanone

196. 2,2-Dimethyl-pentan-3-one

197. 4-Acetyltoluene

198. 2-Acetyltoluene

199. 4-Methyl-benzophenone

Aldehydes

200. Butyraldehyde hydrate

201. Benzaldehyde

202. 3-Phenyl-propenal

203. 3-Methyl butanal

204. 3-Isopropyl-benzaldehyde

205. 4-Nitrobenzaldehyde

206. But-2-enal

207. 3-Hydroxybutanal

208. 3-Hydroxy-3-phenyl-propanal

209. Bromo-acetaldehyde

210. 4-Chloro-butyraldehyde

211. 4-Chloro-benzaldehyde

212. 4-Acetamidobenzaldehyde

General Unknown



215. 2-Propenoic acid

216. But-2-enal

217. Cyclohexene

218. Cyclopenta-1,3-diene

219. 1-Hexene

220. 1-Methyl-cyclohexene

221. nitro-Benzene

222. Styrene

223. Benzoic acid

224. Cyclohexanecarboxylic acid

225. Acetic acid

226. Butanoic acid

227. Propanedioic acid

228. 2-Phenylacetic acid


230. Ethanedioc acid

231. 1-Butanol

232. 1-Hexanol

233. 1-Phenylethanol



236. Bromobenzene

237. N,N-Dimethylacetamide

238. N,N-Diphenylformamide

239. Benzylamine

240. Triethyl amine

241. Aniline

242. N,N-Dimethylaniline

243. Methyl propionate

244. Ethyl heptanoate

245. Ethyl acetoacetate

246. Ethyl benzoate

247. Diethyl ether

248. Tetrahydrofuran

249. Dibenzyl Ether

250. 3-Chloro-cyclohexene


252. Bromocyclohexane

253. Ethyl bromide

254. 2-Chloro-3-methylbutane

255. syn-Butane-2,3-diol

256. Cyclohex-2-enol

257. Acetophenone

258. Cyclohexanone

259. 2-Butanone

260. Benzaldehyde

261. 3-Methyl butanal

262. But-2-enal

E-5

Titration Unknowns

Preset #2

1. 0.1611 M

2. 0.1552 M

3. 0.1518 M

4. 0.1501 M

5. 0.1497 M

6. 0.1503 M

7. 0.1516 M

8. 0.1535 M

9. 0.1559 M

10. 0.1587 M

11. 0.1619 M

12. 0.1654 M

13. 0.1692 M

14. 0.1732 M

15. 0.1774 M

Preset #4

1. 0.2566 M

2. 0.2457 M

3. 0.2389 M

4. 0.2349 M

5. 0.2330 M

6. 0.2328 M

7. 0.2340 M

8. 0.2364 M

9. 0.2399 M

10. 0.2442 M

11. 0.2495 M

12. 0.2556 M

13. 0.2625 M

14. 0.2703 M

15. 0.2788 M

Preset #6

1. 67.52 wt%

2. 66.94 wt%

3. 66.45 wt%

4. 66.05 wt%

5. 65.70 wt%

6. 65.40 wt%

7. 65.13 wt%

8. 64.91 wt%

9. 64.73 wt%

10. 64.62 wt%

11. 64.65 wt%

12. 65.02 wt%

13. 66.16 wt%

14. 68.96 wt%

15. 74.88 wt%

Preset #8

1. 0.3209 M

2. 0.3064 M

3. 0.2968 M

4. 0.2910 M

5. 0.2879 M

6. 0.2870 M

7. 0.2880 M

8. 0.2907 M

9. 0.2948 M

10. 0.3004 M

11. 0.3073 M

12. 0.3156 M

13. 0.3253 M

14. 0.3364 M

15. 0.3491 M

Preset #10

1. 74.84 wt%

2. 74.23 wt%

3. 73.70 wt%

4. 73.24 wt%

5. 72.83 wt%

6. 72.46 wt%

7. 72.13 wt%

8. 71.84 wt%

9. 71.62 wt%

10. 71.51 wt%

11. 71.68 wt%

12. 72.62 wt%

13. 75.45 wt%

14. 82.47 wt%

15. 97.25 wt%

Preset #11

1. 0.3209 M

2. 0.3064 M

3. 0.2968 M

4. 0.2910 M

5. 0.2879 M

6. 0.2870 M

7. 0.2880 M

8. 0.2907 M

9. 0.2948 M

10. 0.3004 M

11. 0.3073 M

12. 0.3156 M

13. 0.3253 M

14. 0.3364 M

15. 0.3491 M

Preset #13

1. 79.12 wt%

2. 78.50 wt%

3. 77.96 wt%

4. 77.47 wt%

5. 77.03 wt%

6. 76.63 wt%

7. 76.28 wt%

8. 75.96 wt%

9. 75.72 wt%

10. 75.62 wt%

11. 75.92 wt%

12. 77.29 wt%

13. 81.48 wt%

14. 91.86 wt%

15. 87.51 wt%

Preset #15

1. 0.0133 M

2. 0.0132 M

3. 0.0131 M

4. 0.0131 M

5. 0.0131 M

6. 0.0131 M

7. 0.0132 M

8. 0.0132 M

9. 0.0133 M

10. 0.0134 M

11. 0.0135 M

12. 0.0136 M

13. 0.0137 M

14. 0.0138 M

15. 0.0139 M

Technology

Instructor utilities guide